LIP-7004N

LIP-7004N
LIP-7004N
LIP-7004N
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
General.............................................................................................. 1
Feature Information ........................................................................... 1
Feature Groupings ............................................................................ 1
iPECS LIP-7004N Phone Description ............................................... 2
2. RECEIVING CALLS ...................................................................3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Answering a Call While Idle............................................................... 3
Responding to a Call While Busy...................................................... 4
Differential Ring Signals .................................................................... 5
Answering Calls at Night ................................................................... 5
Answering Calls to Other Stations .................................................... 6
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls ...................... 6
Forwarding Calls ............................................................................... 7
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail ....................7
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number...................................8
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message .....................................9
3. PLACING A CALL ................................................................... 12
3.1 Internal Calls ................................................................................... 12
3.1.1 Placing Intercom calls ............................................................12
3.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station .........................12
3.1.3 To leave a Message Wait ......................................................13
3.2 External Calls .................................................................................. 14
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls ..............................................14
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ...............................15
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing.................15
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone........................................16
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ..........16
3.3 Using Automated Dialing................................................................. 18
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ..........................................18
3.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial ..................................18
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers.......................................18
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers..................19
4. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING............... 21
4.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ................... 21
4.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state....................................... 21
4.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls........................................ 22
i
LIP-7004N
User Guide
4.4 Joining multiple people in a Conference ......................................... 22
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room..............................................23
4.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page ........................................ 24
5. LEAVING & RESPONDING TO MESSAGES ................................. 25
5.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication..................... 25
5.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages.......................................................... 25
6. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ..................................................... 27
6.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA).............................................. 27
6.2 Mobile Phone Extension.................................................................. 27
7. MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES .................................................. 29
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Background Music and Music on Hold............................................ 29
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ................................ 29
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page ............................................................... 30
Wake-Up Alarm ............................................................................... 30
Alarm/Door Bell ............................................................................... 31
Power Fail Transfer ......................................................................... 31
System Voice Memo ....................................................................... 32
Hot Desk.......................................................................................... 32
8. WORKING WITH PBX, CENTREX AND ISDN FEATURES ............. 34
8.1 Access PBX or Centrex................................................................... 34
8.2 Access the ISDN Network ............................................................... 34
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features................34
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller Id restriction.......................................35
9. SETTING FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS .................................... 36
9.1 Entering Station Program Data ....................................................... 36
9.2 Assigning features to Flex buttons .................................................. 36
10. APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ............................. 37
11. APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ................................... 43
ii
LIP-7004N
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced technology highly versatile
fully featured telecom system designed to make office communications
easy and productive. Employing state of the art Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data converge on a single IP
packet network. Because each iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can
be moved easily throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide simple and
straightforward. The guide starts with the simpler operations of the
iPECS Phone, receiving and placing calls and then to more advanced
features. Each section includes a brief and basic description of each
feature and step-by-step operations
The operations shown in this guide use the system’s base default
Numbering Plan. Your Numbering Plan may be different. Some features
may not be available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the system
Under certain operation conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon
to make emergency calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for
access to the emergency services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls, Placing calls
etc. Within each group, features are arranged according to the difficulty
of operation and frequency of use. In some cases, a feature must be
assigned to a Flex button. Every effort has been taken to divide the
features into a logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
1
LIP-7004N
1.4
User Guide
iPECS LIP-7004N Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-7004N Phone incorporates the latest in VoIP technology
and is intended for basic communications (ex., a lobby or limited use
phone). Features are generally accessed using dial codes entered from
the dial pad.
Dial Pad
Handset
MSG LED
Speaker
Flex buttons
Volume
OHD, Onhook Dial
Hold/Save
iPECS LIP-7004N Diagram
iPECS LIP-7004N Connections
2
LIP-7004N
User Guide
2. Receiving calls
2.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls; Internal/External Ringing
calls, Intercom Voice Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned a Ringing Line Preference to determine
the order in which calls are answered by lifting the handset. Otherwise,
you must press the flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the CO/IP line button
or a LOOP button. External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels
that are programmed to ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay
Ring may be assigned allowing others to answer the call before the call
rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another user; if providing
call coverage for other users, you may also receive Station Call
Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls, etc., will Recall if
left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the ICM Signaling
mode at the receiving phone; in Hands-Free (HF) mode, after the splash
tone and announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In the
Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The ICM Signaling
mode can be assigned in Station Programming.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as needed),
the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 Lift the handset to respond.
3
LIP-7004N
2.2
User Guide
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive Muted Ring, CampOn tones, or Voice-Over announcements. Muted Ring is provided over
the speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You also may
receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on top of the existing call, as
an indication of another call waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice Over to your phone. In
this case, audio is received from both the active call and the Voice Over
announcement at the same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of several ways: place
the existing call on Hold and respond to the new incoming call, activate
One-time DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new call. A
DND Flex button is required for One-Time DND.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button, and cannot be
sent to a SLT or other non-display terminal.
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to announce a call while
you are busy.
OPERATION
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button, and/or
 Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
4
LIP-7004N
2.3
User Guide
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be difficult to tell which
are ringing. The iPECS Phone has 14 Ring Tones available for
differentiating ring from one phone to another. Four of the tones are
stored in the phone’s permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are in
the system’s memory. Four of these ten can be downloaded into the
phone’s memory for use as the 5th to 8th Ring Tone.
OPERATION
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
 Lift Handset
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
 Dial the memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
 Dial tone number 0-9, tone is heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial tone number 1-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
2.4
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to send ring signals
to external bells. You may then answer these calls with Universal Night
Answer (UNA).
OPERATION
To answer a call during Night mode ringing over an external bell:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the UNA code 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG).
5
LIP-7004N
2.5
User Guide
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up (answer) the call.
You may select to answer a call ringing at a specific station (Directed
Call Pick-Up) or you may choose to answer the oldest call ringing to
your station group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with the
Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station’s Private
Line unless you also have an appearance of the Private Line.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
2.6
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
When you need quiet, you can activate Do-Not-Disturb and the phone
will not receive calls. Internal callers will receive a fast busy tone.
Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy, One-Time DND; DND will be active
only for the duration of the present call.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded to the paired
Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate DND Override
and Intrude on the call. The Attendants may also cancel DND at other
stations.
OPERATION
To toggle DND On and Off:
 Dial 553(iPECS-Lik)/516(iPECS-MG).
6
LIP-7004N
2.7
User Guide
Forwarding Calls
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the system.
Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF Voice Mail and External
Voice Mail.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from a different station
(Call Forward, Remote). You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded internally or externally.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls, when station
is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may need to enter
your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a station with an
appearance of the Private Line or to Voice Mail.
OPERATION
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or internal
system resource:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554 (Call Forward code),
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
7
LIP-7004N
User Guide
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can be forwarded
from an internal station or a remote location. You may define the
conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded internally or externally.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station, except recalls,
when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a remote location, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote
location, you must access the system through a DISA enabled CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
8
LIP-7004N


User Guide
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code 554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to return a ‘Text
Message’ to callers. When calling your Station, Internal callers will
automatically receive the selected message or you can send a text
message you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24 characters.
Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and one assigned by you, see
Station Speed Dial Character entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-defined Text Messages; some allow
auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown in message list).
9
LIP-7004N
User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01: LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
Message 02: ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 04: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 05: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06: CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07: IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08: IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09: AT HOME
Message 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE
In iPECS-MG
1:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
2:
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
3:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
4:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
5:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
6:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
7:
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
8:
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
9:
AT HOME
0:
AT BRANCH OFFICE
*
User Custom Message
#
Deactivate
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
10
LIP-7004N
User Guide
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, see section 3.3.3
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (0-9),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 42,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, see section 3.3.3
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
11
LIP-7004N
User Guide
3. Placing a call
3.1
Internal Calls
3.1.1 Placing Intercom calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over the Intercom.
The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice Announce call, a splash tone will
be heard. Ring or Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’ after calling the
user. By changing the mode, a Voice Announce call will ring or a ringing
ICM call will allow Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp
Field (DSS/BLF). A DSS/BLF button lets you call the other station with a
single button press. The button LED displays the other station’s status,
ON, is busy, OFF is idle.
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another station or system
resource automatically. This Prime Line Preference may be immediate
or delayed allowing you to take other actions during the delay.
Otherwise, you may press another Flex button before going off-hook to
override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone will time-out and
after receiving the Howler Tone, your phone will be placed out-ofservice in Intercom Lock-Out. You must hang-up to return to an idle
state.
OPERATION
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 At answer or Splash tone, speak to the called party.
3.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If your called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On, Callback or
Voice Over to the station. With Camp-On, wait off-hook for the called
station to answer. With Callback, the system will call you when the busy
station goes idle. After you answer, the system calls the previously busy
station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate Intrusion. You
may also use Step Call; dial the next station by dialing just the last digit
of the Intercom number.
12
LIP-7004N
User Guide
OPERATION
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 Dial * and wait for an answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 Press CALL BACK and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, after splash-tone, speak.
3.1.3 To leave a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode, you may leave a
Message Wait. The called user will receive a Message Wait indication;
the MSG LED will flash.
OPERATION
To activate Message Waiting,
 Dial 556(iPECS-Lik)/557(iPECS-MG) and hang-up.
13
LIP-7004N
3.2
User Guide
External Calls
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’ are accessed
either by a button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a CO/IP line or by
dial codes. The CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code, you will be able to
access any line from the group. A Flex button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a LOOP button lets you access a line from a group. Dial
codes for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
Individual CO/IP line Access Code
88
88
CO/IP Group access—
CO/IP Group Access Code
801 – 820
801 – 872
8001 – 8200
801 – 824
801 - 872
Line No
01-42
001-200
001-400
001-600
01-80
001-240
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300
iPECS-600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300 & 600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style signals, you may
activate Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing
for banking services, etc.
When placing an IP call, an IP address is dialed using the ‘*’ key in place
of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial will be analyzed
and the system will place the call on the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line Access Restrictions,
in which case you will receive error tone if you attempt to dial or access a
restricted number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of Service
(COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may vary during Day and
Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before placing calls, in
which case you will receive a second dial tone.
14
LIP-7004N
User Guide
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time Restrictions, you will
receive a Call Warning Tone prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency numbers
(ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station on the System,
regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
OPERATION
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you will receive an All
Trunks Busy signal. You may request to be notified when a line
becomes free.
OPERATION
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line,
 Dial 556(iPECS-Lik)/518(iPECS-MG),
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line becomes
available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to track calls for billing
or other purposes. You may enter an Account Code, which is output
from the system to a printer in the SMDR report. You may have an
Account Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex buttons).
OPERATION
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 550,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
15
LIP-7004N
User Guide
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating Temporary COS,
which will deny all dialing from the phone. To deactivate Temporary
COS you must enter the station’s Authorization code.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 21,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 22,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 31,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 32,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by activating Walking COS.
The Walking COS dialing restriction levels are applied for a single call
only. For multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS or use
the FLASH button to regain outside dial tone.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 23,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
16
LIP-7004N

User Guide
Place call as normal.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 33,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
17
LIP-7004N
3.3
User Guide
Using Automated Dialing
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is automatically saved in the
Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer.
OPERATION
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial *.
3.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call to the Save
Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing at a later time. The Save
Number is stored until you save new number.
OPERATION
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED .
 Dial #
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press
SPEED
twice.
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 the system has memory allocated for 800 System
Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The iPECS-300 & 600 systems
have memory allocated for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins
2000-4999). You may, if allowed, use the System Speed Dial to dial
frequently called numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups called System
Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you may access some numbers and
not others and your dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can enter System Speed Dial numbers.
OPERATION
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
18
LIP-7004N

User Guide
Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for iPECS100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 or 600, 2000-2999 for iPECSMG100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-MG300).
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 is allocated memory for 20 Station
Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300
& 600 each support 100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins (000-099).
The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50 Station Speed Dial
numbers (bins (00-49). These numbers are entered at the user’s station
and may include several ‘special’ instructions. Special instructions and
the corresponding button are:
‘#’ – Pause, system will momentarily stop dialing.
Flash as 1st digit – activate dial tone detect.
Flash not as 1st digit – the system will generate a flash on the CO line.
Call Back as 1st digit – Send digits as ISDN Keypad Facility message.
‘*’ as 1st digit - Display Security, the stored number will not be
displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit, - Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover, the system will
switch from pulse to DTMF dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16-character name, may be associated
with the number for Dial by Name which is only available to display
phones. Characters are entered with two keystrokes as in the chart
below.
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry
19
LIP-7004N
User Guide
OPERATION
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000-099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name, if desired, using the Character Entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
20
LIP-7004N
User Guide
4. Transfer, Conference & other Call Handling
4.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other resource of the
system, Call Transfer. You can screen the transfer with the receiving
party (Screened Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer). Transferred calls, internal or
external, are place in Transfer Hold, will receive MOH and will recall if
not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or DND, it
immediately recalls you.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
OPERATION
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call receiving party,
 For Unscreened Call Transfer, hang-up,
 For Screened Call Transfer, at answer or Splash tone, announce call.
4.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one of several
holding states. In System Hold, other non-restricted stations may pickup the call. In Exclusive Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the
call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System or Exclusive).
You may override this Hold Preference by pressing the HOLD/SAVE
button twice.
The LEDs for buttons assigned CO/IP line flash at distinctive rates for
the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a DSS/BLF button that
will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then recall the user.
This Hold Recall is provided with a different ring signal. If not answered
in a timely manner, the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
OPERATION
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
21
LIP-7004N
4.3
User Guide
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on Hold, placing the
active call on Hold acting as a broker between two or more parties,
Broker Call. iPECS Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
OPERATION
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
4.4
Joining multiple people in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3 parties (iPECS-Lik)/13
Party (iPECS-MG) or 24 parties when using a Multi-Party Conference
Interface Module (MCIM). The other parties in the Conference may be
internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2 external parties in a
private conversation. This is an Unsupervised Conference, which is
not subject to the normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF Flex button is required.
OPERATION
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Momentarily press Hook-switch.
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Momentarily press Hook-switch.
 Momentarily press Hook-switch.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Press the CONF button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Press the CONF button.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Press the CONF button
22
LIP-7004N
User Guide
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9 Conference Rooms
can be set up including up to 24 parties when using a MCIM. When
setting up a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invitees (internal and external parties) to use for accessing the
established Conference Room.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room password.
23
LIP-7004N
User Guide
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
4.5
Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special holding location
(Park Orbit), which can be accessed easily from any station in the
system. Typically, this feature is used with Paging to notify the desired
User of Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call Park timer.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601-619 for
iPECS-300 & 600),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601 for iPECS300 & 600).
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541)
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541).
 Dial the Park number(00-49).
24
LIP-7004N
User Guide
5. Leaving & Responding to Messages
Your iPECS Phone allows you to send and receive several types of
messages. These include a Station Message Waiting, and Voice Mail
Message Waiting.
Each of the message types is described in the following paragraphs and
is accessed by dial codes or using a Flex button as described in the
section on each message type.
5.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting indication when
you do not answer or your phone is in DND. A flashing MSG LED on the
iPECS Phone indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may respond with
a call back.
OPERATION
To respond to your Station messages:
 Dial 557(iPECS-Lik)/558(iPECS-MG) to return message.
5.2
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail Box, they can
leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail Box is part of the integrated
Voice Mail module, the iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and management of the
received voice messages. While in your Mail Box, you have control of
your password and Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely
control Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF. You will need
to register an Authorization Code for your station to access VMIM/VSF
Voice messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
 Dial 557,
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
25
LIP-7004N





User Guide
Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the Auto Attendant,
Upon answer, dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up.
In iPECS-MG
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
 Dial 558(Message Wait Answer) or 523(VMIB Access code),
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the Auto Attendant or DID number for VMIB Access,
 Upon answer, dial 523(VMIB Access code) to receive the ‘Mail Box
& Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
26
LIP-7004N
User Guide
6. Remote System Access
6.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote users to gain
access to the system’s resources. The system will recognize remote
user dialed inputs (call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines,
review voice mails, etc). Remote users may be required to enter an
Authorization Code.
OPERATION
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility
 Dial your authorization code (station number and password),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
6.2
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and receive calls on a
registered mobile phone. Calls to your iPECS Phone will ring your
Mobile Phone and you can place calls using the resources of the iPECS.
You may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension feature and
assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature can be activated only through an ISDN CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37.
 Dial the mobile phone number.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 38.
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
27
LIP-7004N
User Guide
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,

NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by pressing
the # key.
In iPECS-MG
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 51.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2.
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,

NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by pressing
the mobile flash digit(*).
28
LIP-7004N
User Guide
7. Miscellaneous Features
7.1
Background Music and Music on Hold
Two audio sources can be connected to the system. These sources or
an internal source provide input for Background Music (BGM) and Music
On Hold (MOH). In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS Phone when idle.
MOH is played to callers placed on Hold.
There are for possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
OPERATION
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
7.2
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other stations and/or
external speakers. Stations are assigned to one or more of the Internal
Page Zones. The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
Page Zone codes in iPECS-Lik are:
1: Internal Page Zones
iPECS 100: 501-510
iPECS 300 & 600: 501-535
2: Internal All Call Page 543
3: External Page Zones 545-546
4: External All Call Page 548
5: All Call Page
549
Page Zone codes in iPECS-MG are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15 ) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zone
548
All Call Page
549
29
LIP-7004N
User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to be recalled when
their turn comes in the queue. Users can also request a paged party
answer the Page using Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party
may answer the page from any phone in the system by dialing the MeetMe code.
OPERATION
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received:
 Dial 556,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial the Meet-Me-Page code 544(iPECS-Lik)/546(iPECS-MG).
7.3
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. Users separately log-in
or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned.
Once logged in, place or receive one-way page announcements to/from
other users who are logged in to the same PTT group.
OPERATION
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0(iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Press the * key.
To place a page to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT Flex button.
 After confirmation tone make page announcement.
7.4
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm Clock for each station. You can set the alarm
clock to repeat daily or as a one-time alarm.
30
LIP-7004N
User Guide
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset, BGM will be
provided.
OPERATION
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 41(iPECS-Lik)/13(iPECS-MG),
 Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
 For a daily (repeating alarm), dial #,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 42(iPECS-Lik)/14(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
7.5
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a unique Alarm
Ring signal may be received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst) may be received
each time the external contact is activated. A system contact also can
be controlled to act as a Door Open contact.
OPERATION
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial Door Open code #* and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS -300 & 600.
—Contacts 1 is available in the iPECS -MG.
7.6
Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation may be provided
with back-up batteries or Power Fail Transfer (PFT). When battery
back-up is provided, the station will operate normally. When PFT is
implemented, a SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This SLT
can be used as any normal SLT, providing service while power is out.
31
LIP-7004N
7.7
User Guide
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several Voice Memos to
provide Station Users with general information such as station number,
date, time, and feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
OPERATION
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (661 for iPECS-100 or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675 for iPECS-MG), date and time memo is
heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (662 for iPECS-100 or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600), the station number memo is heard, “This is
station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (663 for iPECS-100 or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600), Station Status Memo is heard.
7.8
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot Desk operation.
These Hot Desk phones let you log-on and use the Hot Desk phone as if
it were your station. Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on
the attributes assigned to your station number and you can make calls as
normal. When logged-out, calls to your station are forward to the
destination you chose.
32
LIP-7004N
User Guide
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial “* 0”(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Press the * key twice(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
33
LIP-7004N
User Guide
8. Working with PBX, Centrex and ISDN features
8.1
Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host PBX system or
Centrex services from your service provider. The iPECS connects to
such a host with analog CO lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an extension of the host,
allowing access to the host system features using the host dial codes.
While on a call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to other
host extensions or access features of the host. The Flash feature may
be used on other CO lines to regain a dial tone from the CO line without
relinquishing control of the CO line to place another call.
OPERATION
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Momentarily press the Hook-switch,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
8.2
Access the ISDN Network
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services requires that dialed
digits be sent to the ISDN as data and not tones. In this case, dialed
digits are sent as ‘Keypad messages’.
A KEYPAD FACILITY button must be assigned using the Flex Button
program procedures. Once active, dial into the ISDN for services;
however, actions other than dialing will deactivate the ‘Keypad message’
operation.
OPERATION
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
Or
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
34
LIP-7004N
User Guide
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller Id restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of Caller ID to the farend. This may be a subscription service of your carrier. Separate Flex
buttons are required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL), and
incoming, Calling Line ID (CLI) restriction.
OPERATION
To restrict Caller Id:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR / COLR assigned button,
 Place call as usual.
35
LIP-7004N
User Guide
9. Setting Features & Flex buttons
9.1
Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users to assign certain
attributes such as Authorization Codes (Passwords). After entering the
User Program mode, you dial the codes to select the attribute and
setting. Once selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User Program
codes, the feature/function and any input required are given in Appendix
B.
OPERATION
To assign user programmable station attributes:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.2
Assigning features to Flex buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex buttons on your
iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex
buttons. Flex buttons may be assigned for most features providing OneTouch feature activation (e.g., a Flex button may be assigned to access
the Account Code feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF – Enter station number,
Speed Dial – Enter Station/System Speed dial bin number,
Flex Numbering Plan – Enter Flex Numbering Plan code, see Appendix
A,
User Program Code – Press TRANS/PGM and enter a User Program
code, see Appendix B, or
CO/IP line – Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
OPERATION
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program codes,
first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
36
LIP-7004N
User Guide
10. Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
562
565
562
565
562
565
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
37
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-7004N
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620 –
659
66
601619
620 –
667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
8*
8#xx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
9
9
9
0
0
0
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line Access
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
38
Remark
SLT use
only
620 –
667
*66
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
number
LIP-7004N
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
##
*0
##
*0
##
#0
#0
#0
Remark
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
& 600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Name
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
39
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
LIP-7004N
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
Xx: Page Group #
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
548
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
40
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
LIP-7004N
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
41
Remark
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
001 ~ 200: MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf. Room
#
528 + Conf. Room
#
529 + HH:MM
LIP-7004N
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
42
Remark
LIP-7004N
User Guide
11. Appendix B User Program Codes
Code
Function
Remarks
10
11 x
12 x
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting ( X
= 1-2 )
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1~8
Select Ring Tone 1~8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay
(0~9)
Select download Ring Tone
0~9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
32
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
53 xx
Create Conference Room
54 xx
Delete Conference Room
61 x
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
SLT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Yes
Input time, 24 hour clock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
43
Yes
LIP-7004N
Code
User Guide
Function
Remarks
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
70
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
Display Soft Message
Display Serial number/Package for
SMEMU
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
7*
80
81
82
84
85
86
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
*0
**
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Logout Code
44
SLT
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
N/A
Input up to 7 characters
Requires Voice Mail
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Yes
LIP-7004N
In iPECS-MG
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
Set Pre-defined Message.
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
45
LIP-7004N
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
46
LIP-7008D
LIP-7008D
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
General......................................................................................................... 1
Feature Information ...................................................................................... 1
Feature Groupings........................................................................................ 1
iPECS LIP-7008D Phone Description........................................................... 2
2. IPECS PHONE LCD & SPEAKERPHONE ...................................................... 3
2.1 LCD Operation.............................................................................................. 3
2.2 Using the Speakerphone .............................................................................. 3
3. RECEIVING CALLS ...................................................................................... 4
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Answering a Call While Idle .......................................................................... 4
Responding to a Call a While Busy .............................................................. 4
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) ................................................ 5
Differential Ring Signals ............................................................................... 6
Answering Calls............................................................................................ 7
Answering Calls to Other Stations ................................................................ 7
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls .................................. 8
Forwarding Calls........................................................................................... 8
3.8.1
Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail ............................................ 8
3.8.2
Forwarding calls to an external number........................................................... 9
3.8.3
Forwarding callers to a Text Message ........................................................... 11
4. PLACING A CALL ....................................................................................... 14
4.1 Internal Calls............................................................................................... 14
4.1.1
Placing Intercom calls .................................................................................... 14
4.1.2
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ................................................. 14
4.1.3
Leaving a Message Wait................................................................................ 15
4.2 External Calls ............................................................................................. 16
4.2.1
Placing external CO/VoIP calls ...................................................................... 16
4.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ....................................................... 17
4.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing ......................................... 17
4.2.4
Disabling dialing from your phone.................................................................. 18
4.2.5
Temporarily overriding dialing restrictions at a phone ................................... 18
4.3 Using Automated Dialing ............................................................................ 19
4.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR) .................................................................. 19
4.3.2
Using and Entering Save Number Dial .......................................................... 19
4.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers............................................................... 20
4.3.4
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers .......................................... 20
4.3.5
Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name ............................................... 22
4.3.6
ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered................................ 23
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING ................................ 24
i
LIP-7008D
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
User Guide
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ............................... 24
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state .................................................. 24
Broker Call: Switching between two calls ................................................... 25
Joining Multiple People in a Conference .................................................... 25
5.4.1
Setting up & Joining a Conference Room...................................................... 26
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page.................................................... 27
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording calls ............................................................. 28
6. LEAVING & RESPONDING TO MESSAGES.................................................... 29
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication................................. 29
Responding to a CLI Message indication ................................................... 30
Getting Voice Mail Messages ..................................................................... 31
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ............................................ 33
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ........................................................................ 35
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ......................................................... 35
7.2 Mobile Phone Extension............................................................................. 35
8. MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES ..................................................................... 37
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
Background Music and Music on Hold ....................................................... 37
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ............................................ 38
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page .......................................................................... 39
Wake-Up Alarm .......................................................................................... 39
Alarm/Door Bell .......................................................................................... 40
Power Fail Transfer .................................................................................... 40
System Voice Memo................................................................................... 40
Hot Desk..................................................................................................... 41
9. WORKING WITH PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ................................... 42
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex .............................................................................. 42
9.2 Access the ISDN Network .......................................................................... 42
9.2.1
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ........................................ 42
9.2.2
Using ISDN Supplementary Services ............................................................ 43
9.2.3
Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction............................................................. 43
10. SETTING FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ....................................................... 44
10.1 Entering Station Program Data................................................................... 44
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ............................................................ 44
11. APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ................................................. 45
12. APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ....................................................... 51
ii
LIP-7008D
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced technology highly versatile
fully featured telecom system designed to make office communications
easy and productive. Employing state of the art Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data converge on a single IP
packet network. Because each iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can
be moved easily throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide simple and
straightforward. The guide starts with the simpler operations of the
iPECS Phone Speakerphone, moves to receiving and placing calls and
then to more advanced features. Each section includes a brief and basic
description of each feature and step-by-step operations
The operations shown in this guide use the system’s base default
Numbering Plan. Your Numbering Plan may be different. Some features
may not be available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the system
Under certain operation conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon
to make emergency calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for
access to the emergency services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls, Placing calls
etc. Within each group, features are arranged according to the difficulty
of operation and frequency of use. In some cases, a feature must be
assigned to a Flex button. Every effort has been taken to divide the
features into a logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
1
LIP-7008D
1.4
User Guide
iPECS LIP-7008D Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-7008D Phone incorporates the latest in VoIP technology
and user interface to provide you with a cost effective, simple to use,
productive communications tool. It includes a 2-line 24-character per line
LCD.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed either using the
Fixed or Flexible buttons. In the remainder of this User Guide, the Fixed
or Flexible buttons are shown with a box surrounding the BUTTON .
iPECS LIP-7008D Phone Diagram
iPECS LIP-7008D Connections
2
LIP-7008D
User Guide
2. iPECS Phone LCD & Speakerphone
2.1
LCD Operation
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the iPECS LIP-7008D Phone has
two lines of 24 characters each. The LCD is used to convey information
to you. It provides date, time and station number display while idle. It
will also provide called/calling name/number display, feature status and a
menu to guide you through User Program selections.
2.2
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except for Paging) in
place of lifting the handset to receive or place calls. Place calls using
On-hook Dialing; dialing while using the Speakerphone.
In addition, you may switch between the handset and Speakerphone
during a call. By keeping the handset Off-hook, you activate the Group
Listen feature, which provides incoming audio over the speaker with
outgoing audio from the handset. This allows a local ‘group’ to listen to
both sides of the conversation without interfering with the conversation.
While on the Speakerphone, you can Mute the microphone with the
MUTE button. When Mute is active, the MUTE button LED will be ON. A
Flex button must be assigned for Mute operation (refer to Section 10.2,
Assigning Features to Flex Buttons).
With Auto Speaker Select, when you activate/access a feature by
pressing its button, the Speakerphone is activated automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the On/Off-hook
state for the phone.
OPERATION
To activate the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
 Press SPEAKER ; the phone will go off-hook presenting audio from the
speaker and to the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲.
To Mute the microphone:
 Press MUTE .
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:
 Press SPEAKER .
3
LIP-7008D
User Guide
3. Receiving Calls
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls; Internal/External Ringing
calls, Intercom Voice Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned a Ringing Line Preference to determine
the order incoming calls are answered by lifting the handset. Otherwise,
you must press the flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the CO/IP line button
or a LOOP button. External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels
that are programmed to ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay
Ring may be assigned allowing others to answer the call before the call
rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another user; if providing
call coverage for other users, you may also receive Station Call
Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls, etc., will Recall if
left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the ICM Signaling
mode at the receiving phone; in Hands-Free (HF) mode, after the splash
tone and announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In the
Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The ICM Signaling
mode can be assigned in Station Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available, the name of the
Station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name Display.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as needed),
the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 In HF mode signaling, simply speak as normal into the microphone
or,
 In Privacy mode signaling, lift the handset to respond.
3.2
Responding to a Call a While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive Muted Ring, CampOn tones, or Voice-Over announcements. Muted Ring is provided over
the speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You also may
4
LIP-7008D
User Guide
receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on top of the existing call, as
an indication of a call waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice Over to your phone. In
this case, audio is received from both the active call and the Voice Over
announcement at the same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of several ways: place
the existing call on Hold and respond to the new incoming call, activate
One-time DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new call. A
DND Flex button is required for One-Time DND.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button, and cannot be
sent to a SLT or other non-display terminal.
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to announce a call while
you are busy.
OPERATION
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button, and/or
 Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
3.3
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can screen the call as
with a normal Answering Machine. The caller’s voice is played over your
speaker while the message is being recorded. There are two methods of
notification and call screening provided, Ring or Speaker mode.
In the Ring mode (iPECS-Lik)/LED Blink mode(iPECS-MG), the AME
(Answering Machine Emulation) Flex button will flash to notify of a call.
You may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message is
stored. In the Speaker mode, when the call is sent to the voice mailbox,
the caller’s voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of your
iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice mail to record a
message, talk with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox,
or answer the call and disconnect the Voice Mail. The AME feature is
only available when using the iPECS integrated Voice Mail; a MUTE and
AME button are required.
5
LIP-7008D
User Guide
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To assign an AME button:
Ring Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 0 + HOLD/SAVE
Speaker Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 1 + HOLD/SAVE
To screen a call in the Ring mode:
 Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over
the station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the Speaker
operation mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
 Press the illuminated SPEAKER button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail:
 Press the illuminated MUTE button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
 Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and the
Voice Mail disconnected.
In iPECS-MG
To assign an AME button:
LED Blink Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 524 + 1 +
Speaker Hearing Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 2 +
3.4
HOLD/SAVE
HOLD/SAVE
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be difficult to tell which
are ringing. The iPECS Phone has 14 Ring Tones available for
differentiating ring from one phone to another. Four of the tones are
stored in the phone’s permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are in
the system’s memory. Four of these ten can be downloaded into the
phone’s memory for use as the 5th to 8th Ring Tone.
OPERATION
To download a Ring Tone from System to the phone’s memory:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
6
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial tone number 0-9, tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone’s memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial tone number 1-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.





3.5
Answering Calls
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to send ring signals
to external bells. You may then answer these calls with Universal
Answer (UA).
OPERATION
To answer a call during Night mode ringing over an external bell:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the UA code 567 (iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG).
3.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up (answer) the call.
You may select to answer a call ringing at a specific station (Directed
Call Pick-Up) or you may choose to answer the oldest call ringing to
your station group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with the
Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station’s Private
Line unless you also have an appearance of the Private Line.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
7
LIP-7008D

3.7
User Guide
Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
When you need quiet, you can activate Do-Not-Disturb and the phone
will not receive calls. Internal callers will receive a fast busy tone and the
display will show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy,
(One-Time DND); DND will be active only for the duration of the present
call and requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded to the paired
Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate DND Override
and Intrude on the call. The Attendants may also cancel DND at other
stations.
OPERATION
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 Press the DND button.
3.8
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the system.
Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF Voice Mail and External
Voice Mail. Your LCD and the LCD of the forward receiver will both
indicate the forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from a different station
(Call Forward, Remote). You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded internally or externally.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls, when the
station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may need to enter
your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a station with an
appearance of the Private Line or to Voice Mail.
8
LIP-7008D
User Guide
OPERATION
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or internal
system resource:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554 (Call Forward code),
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can be forwarded
from an internal station or a remote location. You may define the
conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded internally or externally.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station, except recalls,
when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
9
LIP-7008D
User Guide
When you forward calls from a different station or a remote location, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote
location, you must access the system through a DISA enabled CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code 554,
 Enter your Authorization Code (Station & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
10
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Press HOLD/SAVE
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE
 Replace the handset, return to idle.


3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to return a ‘Text
Message’ to internal callers. When calling your Station, Internal callers
will automatically receive the selected message or you can send a text
message you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24 characters.
Ten assigned by the Attendant and one assigned by you, see Station
Speed Dial Character entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-defined Text Messages; some allow
auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01: LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
Message 02: ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 04: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 05: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06: CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07: IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08: IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09: AT HOME
Message 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE
11
LIP-7008D
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
1:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
2:
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
3:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
4:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
5:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
6:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
7:
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
8:
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
9:
AT HOME
0:
AT BRANCH OFFICE
*
User Custom Message
#
Deactivate
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message;
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, see section 4.3.4
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (0-9),
12
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 42,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, see section 3.3.3
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.


13
LIP-7008D
User Guide
4. Placing a call
4.1
Internal Calls
4.1.1 Placing Intercom calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over the Intercom.
The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice Announce call, a splash tone will
be heard. Ring or Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’ after calling the
user. By changing the mode, a Voice Announce call will ring or a ringing
ICM call will allow Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp
Field (DSS/BLF). A DSS/BLF button lets you call the other station with a
single button press. The button LED displays the other station’s status,
ON, is busy, OFF is idle.
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another station or system
resource automatically. This Prime Line Preference may be immediate
or delayed allowing you to take other actions during the delay.
Otherwise, you may press another Flex button before going off-hook to
override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone will time-out and
after receiving Howler Tone, your phone will be placed out-of-service in
Intercom Lock-Out. You must hang-up to return to an idle state.
OPERATION
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 At answer or Splash tone, speak to the called party.
4.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If your called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On, Callback or
Voice Over to the station. With Camp-On, wait off-hook for the called
station to answer. With Callback, the system will call you when the busy
station goes idle. After you answer, the system calls the previously busy
station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate Intrusion. You
may also use Step Call; dial the next station by dialing just the last digit
of the Intercom number.
14
LIP-7008D
User Guide
OPERATION
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 Dial *, and wait for an answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 Press CALL BACK and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, after splash-tone, speak.
4.1.3 Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND, you may leave a
Message Wait. The called user will receive a Message Wait indication;
the LED of the CALL BACK button will flash.
OPERATION
To activate Message Waiting:
 Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
15
LIP-7008D
4.2
User Guide
External Calls
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’ are accessed
either by a button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a CO/IP line or by
dial codes. The CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code, you will be able to
access any line from the group. A Flex button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a LOOP button lets you access a line from a group. Dial
codes for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
Individual CO/IP line Access Code
88
88
CO/IP Group access—
CO/IP Group Access Code
801 – 820
801 – 872
8001 – 8200
801 – 824
801 - 872
Line No
01-42
001-200
001-400
001-600
01-80
001-240
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300
iPECS-600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300 & 600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style signals, you may
activate Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing
for banking services, etc.
When placing an IP call, an IP address is dialed using the ‘*’ key in place
of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial will be analyzed
and the system will place the call on the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line Access Restrictions,
in which case you will receive error tone if you attempt to dial or access a
restricted number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of Service
(COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may vary during Day and
Night operation (Day/Night COS).
16
LIP-7008D
User Guide
You may need to enter an Authorization code before placing calls, in
which case you will receive a second dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time Restrictions, you will
receive a Call Warning Tone prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency numbers
(ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station on the System,
regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
OPERATION
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you will receive an All
Trunks Busy signal. You may request to be notified when a line becomes
free.
OPERATION
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line button,
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line comes
available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to track calls for billing
or other purposes. You may enter an Account Code, which is output
from the system to a printer in the SMDR report. You must have an
Account Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex buttons).
OPERATION
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Dial *; Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
17
LIP-7008D
User Guide
To enter an Account Code during a call:
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Dial *.
4.2.4 Disabling dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating Temporary COS,
which will deny all dialing from the phone. To deactivate Temporary
COS you must enter the station’s Authorization code.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 21,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 22,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 31,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 32,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5 Temporarily overriding dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by activating Walking COS.
The Walking COS dialing restriction levels are applied for a single call
18
LIP-7008D
User Guide
only. For multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS or use
the FLASH button to regain outside dial tone.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 23,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 33,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
4.3
Using Automated Dialing
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is automatically saved in the
Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer. For users of an iPECS Display
Phone, the system will store the numbers dialed on the last ten calls.
OPERATION
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED or dial 552,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select from the last 10 numbers dialed,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call to the Save
Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing at a later time. The Save
Number is stored until you save new number.
OPERATION
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
19
LIP-7008D


Press
User Guide
SPEED .
Dial #
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press
SPEED
twice.
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 200-999), for iPECS-MG 100(2000-2999). The
iPECS-300 & 600, iPECS-MG 300 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999). You may, if
allowed, use the System Speed Dial to dial frequently called numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups called System
Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you may access some numbers and
not others and your dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
OPERATION
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset, or press the Speaker button,
 Press Speed ,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for iPECS100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 & 600, 2000-2999 for iPECS-MG100,
2000-4999 for iPECS-MG300).
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 is allocated memory for 20 Station
Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300
& 600 support 100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-099). The
iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers
(bins (00-49). These numbers are entered at the user’s station and may
include several ‘special’ instructions. Special instructions and the
corresponding button are:
‘#’ – Pause, system will momentarily stop dialing.
FLASH as 1st digit – activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit – the system will generate a flash on the CO
line.
st
CALL BACK as 1 digit – Send digits as ISDN Keypad Facility
message.
‘*’ as 1st digit - Display Security, the stored number will not be
displayed when used.
20
LIP-7008D
User Guide
‘*’ not as 1st digit, - Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover, the system
will switch from pulse to DTMF dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16-character name, may be associated
with the number for Dial by Name. Characters are entered with two
keystrokes as in the chart below.
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry
OPERATION
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000-099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
21
LIP-7008D
User Guide
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name
Dial by Name employs three ‘Directories’: Intercom, User or Station
Speed Dial and System Speed Dial. To allow others to contact you via
the Intercom directory, you must enter a name for your station, up to 12
characters.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press SPEED twice,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Intercom, 2: User Speed Dial, 3:
System Speed Dial, the LCD displays the first two names, in
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button; to enter characters, refer to
the character entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.

NOTE—To toggle between the name and number displays, press the
TRANS/PGM button.
To enter your station user name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 74 (User Name Program code),
 Dial name, up to 12 characters (using the
in Section 4.3.4),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press SPEED twice,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Intercom,
System Speed Dial, the LCD displays
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button; to
the character entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
alpha-numeric entry chart
2: User Speed Dial, 3:
the first two names, in
enter characters, refer to

NOTE—To toggle between the name and number displays, press the
TRANS/PGM button.
22
LIP-7008D
User Guide
To enter your station user name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 12 (User Name Program code),
 Dial name, up to 12 characters (using the alpha-numeric entry chart
in Section 4.3.4),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6 ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered
When making an external call and a busy signal is received, the system
can be set to retry the number until the call is connected, the feature is
cancelled, or the maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker then place the call
with the microphone muted. When the remote end answers, you must
select the SPEAKER button or lift the handset. Either of these actions will
cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the remote party. A
Redial button must be assigned at the station.
OPERATION
To set up an ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
 Press REDIAL ,
 Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
 Press REDIAL .
23
LIP-7008D
User Guide
5. Transfer, Conference & Other Call Handling
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other resource of the
system, Call Transfer. You can screen the transfer with the receiving
party (Screened Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer). Transferred calls, internal or
external, are placed in Transfer Hold, will receive MOH and will recall if
not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or DND, it
immediately recalls you.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
OPERATION
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call receiving party,
 For Unscreened Call Transfer, hang-up,
 For Screened Call Transfer, at answer or Splash tone, announce
call.
5.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one of several
holding states. In System Hold, other non-restricted stations may pickup the call. In Exclusive Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the
call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System or Exclusive).
You may override this Hold Preference by pressing the HOLD/SAVE
button twice.
The LEDs for buttons assigned CO/IP line flash at distinctive rates for
the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a DSS/BLF button that
will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then recall the user.
This Hold Recall is provided with a different ring signal. If not answered
in a timely manner, the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
OPERATION
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
24
LIP-7008D
5.3
User Guide
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on Hold, placing the
active call on Hold acting as a broker between two or more parties,
Broker Call. iPECS Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
OPERATION
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
5.4
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3 parties (iPECS-Lik)/13
Party (iPECS-MG), or 24 parties when using a Multi-Party Conference
Interface Module (MCIM). The other parties in the Conference may be
internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2 external parties in a
private conversation. This is an Unsupervised Conference, which is
not subject to the normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF Flex button is required.
OPERATION
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties, and press
the CONF button when connected,
 Establish call with another conference party, and press the CONF
button when connected (repeat as needed to add more parties),
 Press CONF again to establish the conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button; the CONF button LED will flash.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Press CONF .
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Press CONF .
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Press CONF .
25
LIP-7008D
User Guide
5.4.1 Setting up & Joining a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9 Conference Rooms
can be set up including up to 24 parties when using a MCIM and up to 13
parties(iPECS-MG). When setting up a Conference Room, a password
can be designated for invitees (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
26
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.


5.5
Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special holding location
(Park Orbit), which can be accessed easily from any station in the
system. Typically, this feature is used with Paging to notify the desired
User of Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call Park timer.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601-619 for
iPECS-300 & 600),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601 to 619 for
iPECS-300 & 600).
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541)
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541).
 Dial the Park number(00-49).
27
LIP-7008D
5.6
User Guide
Two-Way Record: Recording calls
You may record an active external conversation in your Voice Mail Box.
A RECORD button is required to access this feature.
OPERATION
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Press RECORD , record warning tone heard and recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Press RECORD or hang-up and return to idle.
28
LIP-7008D
User Guide
6. Leaving & Responding to Messages
The iPECS Phone allows you to send and receive several types of
messages. These are accessed via the Message Summary Display, and
described in the following paragraphs:
In iPECS-Lik
1: ST—Station Message Wait,
2: CL—CLI Message Wait
3: VS—VSF Message Wait
4: VM—Commercial Voice Mail
5: FS—Feature server
6: MS—SMS message wait.
In iPECS-MG
1: MWI—Message Wait Indication,
2: VMS—VMIB Message.
3: SMS—SMS Message.
6.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting indication when
you do not answer or your phone is in DND. A flashing MSG LED on the
iPECS Phone indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may review and
delete messages as well as respond with a call back.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To review your Station messages:
 Press CALL BACK , the LCD shows the Message Summary display,
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
Dial 1 to view the Station messages,
Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press SAVE button to return the call from the current message.


29
LIP-7008D
User Guide
To delete the Station Message Wait:
 Press the * key,
 Dial 1.
To delete all Message Waits:
 Press the SPEED button,
 Press the * key twice.
In iPECS-MG
To review your Station messages:
 Press CALL BACK , the LCD shows the Message Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00) SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)
Dial 1 to view the Station messages,
Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press SAVE button to return the call from the current message.


6.2
Responding to a CLI Message indication
When external calls to your phone are not answered and Caller
Identification is provided from the network, a Calling Line ID. (CLI)
message is logged. You may review, delete or return these messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press the flashing CLI MESSAGE button, the first CLI message
information is displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CPI message wait information.
To review CLI Messages using the Summary Display:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004


Dial 2, the first CLI message information is displayed,
Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CLI message wait information.
30
LIP-7008D
User Guide
To delete the current CLI Message:
 Press the * key, the next CLI message is displayed.
To delete all CLI Messages:
 Press SPEED ,
 Press * twice.
To return the current CLI message:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press the CALL LOG button, the Call Log message information is
displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through Log message wait
information.(M means the missed call and  means the answered
call).
01 M 101
02  100
To return the current CLI message:
Press
6.3
HOLD/SAVE .
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail Box, they can
leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail Box is part of the integrated
Voice Mail module, the iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and management of the
received voice messages. The VMIM/VSF(iPECS-Lik)/VMIB(iPECSMG) allows you to listen to, save, and forward messages. While in your
Mail Box, you have control of your password and Mail Box greeting. In
addition, you can remotely control Call Forward for your station from the
Voice Mail. You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access VSF Voice messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
31
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Press the VM Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the display,


ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
Dial 3 for VMIM/VSF, 4 for external VM or 5 for Feature Server
Voice Mail,
 After the prompt enter your station number and password, to receive
the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompts sequentially,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer, dial # to receive ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the
‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes, then hang-up.

In iPECS-MG
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
 Press the VM access button or dial 523(VMIB access code),
 Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the display,
MWI (01) VMS (00) SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)

Dial 2 for VMIM
32
LIP-7008D
User Guide
After the prompt enter your station number and password, to receive
the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompts sequentially,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer, dial 523(VMIB Access code) to receive ‘Mail Box &
Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the
‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes, then hang-up.

6.4
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (max. 100 alphanumeric
characters) with other iPECS display phone users. These messages will
activate the CALL BACK button LED and are displayed on the iPECS
Phone LCD.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display phone user:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 36 (SMS send code),
 Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to edit an existing
message or to send a new one,
 Dial the station range to receive the message (to send to a single
station enter the station number twice),
 Enter your message using 2 key strokes for each character, see
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004

Dial 6 (retrieve SMS), the first two SMS messages display in brief,
33
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
 Press #,
 Dial 1 to delete the message, 2 to cancel or 3 to delete all received
Short text messages.

In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display phone user:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 43 (SMS send code),
 Dial the station number to receive the message
 Press HOLD/SAVE.
 Enter your message using 2 key strokes for each character, see
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00) SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)


Dial 3 (retrieve SMS), the first two SMS messages display in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
34
LIP-7008D
User Guide
7. Remote System Access
7.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote users to gain
access to the system’s resources. The system will recognize remote
user dialed inputs (call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines,
review voice mails, etc). Remote users may be required to enter an
Authorization Code.
OPERATION
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Dial your authorization code (station number and password),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
7.2
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and receive iPECS
calls on a registered mobile phone. You may need to activate the Mobile
Phone Extension feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is effective only through an ISDN CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37,
 Dial the mobile phone number,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 38,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
CLID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
35
LIP-7008D
User Guide
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Press the * key while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by
pressing the # key.
In iPECS-MG
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 51.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2.
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,

NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by
pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
36
LIP-7008D
User Guide
8. Miscellaneous Features
8.1
Background Music and Music on Hold
Two audio sources can be connected to the system. These sources or
an internal source provide input for Background Music (BGM) and Music
On Hold (MOH). In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS Phone when the
station is idle. MOH is played to callers placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
OPERATION
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
In iPECS-MG
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 51.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2.
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,
37
LIP-7008D
User Guide
NOTE—BGM is not supported in iPECS-MG.
8.2
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other stations and/or
external speakers. Stations are assigned to one or more of the Internal
Page Zones. The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
Page Zone codes in iPECS-Lik are:
1: Internal Page Zones
iPECS 100: 501-510
iPECS 300 & 600: 501-535
2: Internal All Call Page 543
3: External Page Zones 545-546
4: External All Call Page 548
5: All Call Page
549
Page Zone codes in iPECS-MG are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15 ) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zone
548
All Call Page
549
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to be recalled when
their turn comes in the queue. Users can also request a paged party
answer the Page using Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party
may answer the page from any phone in the system by dialing the MeetMe code.
OPERATION
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received:
 Press CALL BACK ,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Meet-Me-Page code 544 (iPECS-Lik)/546(iPECS-MG).
38
LIP-7008D
8.3
User Guide
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. Users separately log-in
or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned.
Once logged in, place or receive one-way page announcements to/from
other users who are logged in to the same PTT group.
OPERATION
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 and 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG, the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
 After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
8.4
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the system. The
alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset, BGM will be
provided.
OPERATION
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 41(iPECS-Lik)/13(iPECS-MG),
 Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
 For a daily (repeating alarm), dial #,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 42 (iPECS-Lik)/14(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
39
LIP-7008D
8.5
User Guide
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a unique Alarm
Ring signal and LCD display may be received. To restart the monitor
circuit, the external contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring
signal terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst) may be received
each time the external contact is activated. A system contact also can
be controlled to act as a Door Open contact.
OPERATION
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial Door Open code #* and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS -300 & 600.
—Contacts 1 is available in the iPECS -MG.
8.6
Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation may be provided
with back-up batteries or Power Fail Transfer (PFT). When battery
back-up is provided, the station will operate normally. When PFT is
implemented, a SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This SLT
can be used as any normal SLT, providing service while power is out.
8.7
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several Voice Memos to
provide Station Users with general information such as station number,
date, time, and feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
40
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
OPERATION
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (661 for iPECS-100 or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600), 675-1 for iPECS-MG), date and time memo is
heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (662 for iPECS-100 or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675-2 for iPECS-MG), the station number memo
is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (663 for iPECS-100 or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675-3 for iPECS-MG), Station Status Memo is
heard.
8.8
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot Desk operation.
These Hot Desk phones let you log-on and use the Hot Desk phone as if
it were your station. Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on
the attributes assigned to your station number and you can make calls as
normal. When logged-out, calls to your station are forward to the
destination you chose.
OPERATION
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial “* 0”(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial * twice(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),,
 Use the ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select a call forward destination for your
calls, speed dial, joined mobile phone, VMIM/VSF, or VM group,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
41
LIP-7008D
User Guide
9. Working with PBX, Centrex & ISDN features
9.1
Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host PBX system or
Centrex services from your service provider. The iPECS connects to
such a host with analog CO lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an extension of the host,
allowing access to the host system features using the host dial codes.
While on a call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to other
host extensions or access features of the host. The Flash feature may
be used on other CO lines to regain dial tone from the CO line without
relinquishing control of the CO line to place another call.
OPERATION
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Press FLASH ,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
9.2
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services requires that dialed
digits be sent to the ISDN as data and not tones. In this case, dialed
digits are sent as ‘Keypad messages’.
A KEYPAD FACILITY button must be assigned using the Flex Button
program procedures. Once active, dial into the ISDN for services;
however, actions other than dialing will deactivate the ‘Keypad message’
operation.
OPERATION
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
Or
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
42
LIP-7008D
User Guide
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar to those of
Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary services are provided on a
subscription basis and, as with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash
button on an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be placed on Hold and a
second call placed on the line. You may then alternate between the two
held calls (Broker Call) using the HOLD button. An ISDN line conference
can be established using the FLASH and CONF buttons. The conference
can also be placed on hold.
OPERATION
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary services:
 Press FLASH ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , CONF , or CO line assigned button to activate the
desired feature.
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of Caller ID to the farend. This may be a subscription service of your carrier. Separate Flex
buttons are required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL), and
incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
OPERATION
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR / COLR assigned button,
 Place call as usual.
43
LIP-7008D
User Guide
10. Setting Features & Flex buttons
10.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users to assign certain
attributes such as Authorization Codes (Passwords). After entering the
User Program mode, you dial the codes to select the attribute and
setting. Once selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User Program
codes, the feature/function and any input required are given in Appendix
B.
OPERATION
To assign user programmable station attributes:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex buttons on your
iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex
buttons. Flex buttons may be assigned for most features providing OneTouch feature activation (e.g., a Flex button may be assigned to access
the Account Code feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF – Enter station number,
Speed Dial – Enter Station/System Speed dial bin number,
Flex Numbering Plan – Enter Flex Numbering Plan code, see
Appendix A,
User Program Code – Press TRANS/PGM and enter a User Program
code, see Appendix B, or
CO/IP line – Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
OPERATION
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program codes,
first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
44
LIP-7008D
User Guide
11. Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
Feature
iPECS
100
iPECS
300
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
562
562
562
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
45
iPECS
600
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS
100
iPECS
300
Answering Machine Emulation
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620659
66
601619
620667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line Access
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
46
iPECS
600
Remark
SLT use
only
620-667
*66
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
number
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS
100
iPECS
300
iPECS
600
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
#0
#0
#0
Remark
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
& 600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Name
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
47
Remark
LIP-7008D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group #
548
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
48
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
LIP-7008D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
Location
(00 ~ 49)
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
49
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
001 ~ 200: MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf. Room
#
528 + Conf. Room
#
529 + HH:MM
LIP-7008D
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
50
Remark
LIP-7008D
User Guide
12. Appendix B User Program Codes
Code
10
11 x
12 x
Function
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
( X = 1-2 )
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
Remarks
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay (09)
Select download Ring Tone
0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
32
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
53
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
61 x
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Yes
Input time, 24 hour clock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
51
SLT
Yes
LIP-7008D
User Guide
Code
Function
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
70
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
Display Soft Message
Display Serial number/Package
for SMEMU
7*
80
Assign
81
82
84
85
86
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
*0
**
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
RECORD
Remarks
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
SLT
Input up to 7 characters
Yes
Requires VSF/External SMDI
VM
Button
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
52
LIP-7008D
In iPECS-MG
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
Set Pre-defined Message.
43
Send SMS Message
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
62
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
Create a Station User Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
53
LIP-7008D
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
71
Register Station ICLID
72
81
82
83
91
92
View Station ICLID
View IP Address
View Mac Address
View IP Phone version
System Version
System IP Address
Remark
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
54
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
LIP-7016D & 7024D
User Guide
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................1
1.1 General.............................................................................................. 1
1.2 Feature Information ........................................................................... 1
1.3 Feature Groupings ............................................................................ 1
1.4 iPECS LIP-7016D & 7024D Phone Description................................ 2
2. IPECS PHONE LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ......................5
2.1 LCD Operation .................................................................................. 5
2.2 Using the Speakerphone................................................................... 5
2.3 Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset................................................. 6
3. RECEIVING CALLS .......................................................................................7
3.1 Answering a Call While Idle .............................................................. 7
3.2 Responding to a Call While Busy...................................................... 8
3.3 Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) .................................... 8
3.4 Differential Ring Signals .................................................................... 9
3.5 Answering Calls............................................................................... 10
3.6 Answering Calls to Other Stations .................................................. 10
3.7 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls .................... 11
3.8 Forwarding Calls ............................................................................. 11
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail ................ 11
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number................................ 12
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message.................................. 14
4. PLACING A CALL .......................................................................................16
4.1 Internal Calls ................................................................................... 16
4.1.1 Placing Intercom calls ........................................................... 16
4.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ........................ 16
4.1.3 Leaving a Message Wait....................................................... 17
4.2 External Calls .................................................................................. 17
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls ............................................. 17
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line .............................. 18
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing................ 19
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ........................................... 19
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ............. 20
4.3 Using Automated Dialing................................................................. 20
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ......................................... 20
4.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial ................................. 21
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers...................................... 21
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers................. 21
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name ...................... 23
4.3.6 ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered ...... 24
i
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING .................................26
5.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ................... 26
5.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state ...................................... 26
5.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls........................................ 27
5.4 Joining Multiple People in a Conference......................................... 27
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room............................................. 28
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page ....................................... 29
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call................................................. 30
6. GET YOUR MESSAGES & SEND SMS.........................................................31
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication..................... 31
6.2 Responding to a CLI Message indication ....................................... 32
6.3 Getting Voice Mail Messages.......................................................... 33
6.4 Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ................................ 35
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS .........................................................................37
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA).............................................. 37
7.2 Mobile Phone Extension ................................................................. 37
8. MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES ......................................................................39
8.1 Call Log ........................................................................................... 39
8.2 Background Music and Music on Hold............................................ 40
8.3 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ................................ 40
8.4 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page ............................................................... 41
8.5 Wake-Up Alarm ............................................................................... 42
8.6 Alarm/Door Bell ............................................................................... 42
8.7 Power Fail Transfer ......................................................................... 43
8.8 System Voice Memo ....................................................................... 43
8.9 Hot Desk.......................................................................................... 44
9. WORKING WITH PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ...................................45
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex features..................................................... 45
9.2 Access the ISDN Network............................................................... 45
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features............... 45
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services ................................... 46
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction.................................... 46
10. SETTING FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS .......................................................47
10.1 Entering Station Program Data ....................................................... 47
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ................................................ 47
11. APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ................................................48
12. APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ......................................................54
ii
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced-technology, highly-versatile,
fully-featured telecom system designed to make office communications
easy and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data converge on a single IP
packet network. Because each iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can
be moved easily throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide simple and
straightforward. The guide starts with the simpler operations of the
iPECS Phone Speakerphone, moves on to receiving and placing calls,
and then to more advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step operations.
The operations shown in this guide use the system’s base default
Numbering Plan. Your Numbering Plan may be different. Some
features may not be available for you to access or may be subject to
certain limitations based on the set-up of the system.
Under certain operation conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon
to make emergency calls. Alternative arrangements should be made
for access to the emergency services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a logical and
consistent sequence so that features can be quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving Calls, Placing Calls
etc. Within each group, features are arranged according to the difficulty
of operation and frequency of use.
1
LIP-7016D/7024D
1.4
User Guide
iPECS LIP-7016D & 7024D Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-7016D and LIP-7024D Phones incorporate the latest in
VoIP technology and user interface to provide you with a cost effective,
simple to use, productive communications tool. It includes a large 3-line
24-character per line LCD. The bottom line of the display is an
interactive menu accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just below the display.
The Navigation button in the lower center of the Phone allows you to
move through the menu choices when more than three selections are
available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed either using the
Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting a menu item using the Soft
buttons. In the remainder of this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible
buttons are shown with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double underline.
iPECS LIP-7016D
iPECS LIP-7024D
2
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Handset
Interactive
LCD
3 Soft buttons
Speaker
Flex buttons
Dial pad
Fixed Feature buttons:
Speaker
Hold/Save
Speed
Trans/Pgm
DND
Call Back
Volume
Navigation
button
Microphone
iPECS LIP-7016D/7024D Diagram
3
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
iPECS Phone
headset jack
iPECS Phone
LAN connection
iPECS Phone to
PC connection
iPECS Phone
handset connection
iPECS LIP-7016D/7024D Connections
4
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
2. iPECS Phone LCD, Speakerphone & Related Features
2.1
LCD Operation
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the iPECS LIP-7016D and LIP7024D has three lines of 24 characters each. The LCD is used to
convey information to you. It provides the date, time and station
number on the display while idle. It will also provide called/calling
name/number display, feature status and an interactive menu to guide
you through feature access and User Program selections.
2.2
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except for Paging) in
place of lifting the handset to receive or place calls. Place calls using
On-hook dialing with the Speakerphone.
In addition, you may switch between the handset and Speakerphone
during a call. By keeping the handset Off-hook, the Group Listen
feature is activated, which provides incoming audio over the speaker
with outgoing audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to
listen to both sides of the conversation without interfering with the
conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute the microphone
using the Mute Soft button. When Mute is active, the Mute Soft button
toggles to Speak, which is used to turn off Mute.
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a feature by pressing
its button will activate the Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the ON/OFF-hook
state for the phone.
OPERATION
To activate the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
 Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook with audio from the
speaker and to microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button.
To Mute the microphone:
 Select the Mute Soft button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):
 Press the Speak Soft button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:
 Press the SPEAKER button.
5
LIP-7016D/7024D
2.3
User Guide
Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset
The iPECS LIP-7024D may be equipped with the BTU (Bluetooth Unit)
option that lets you use a Wireless headset such as a Jabra BT-200, BT250 or Plantronics M3000. Using a headset permits you to move freely
around the phone within approximately 10 meters and maintain a
conversation. Before using the headset, the headset must be “paired”
with the BTU, and then the headset must be enabled for use.
Operation of the iPECS LIP-7024D with the headset is the same as with
the Speakerphone; merely use the Speaker button to go ON and OFFhook.
NOTE—during the pairing operation, the headset and phone should
be as close as possible but not more than 1 meter apart.
OPERATION
To pair the wireless headset to the BTU:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 3,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To enable/disable the wireless headset:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 4,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To unpair the headset:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 3,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
6
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
3. Receiving calls
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls; internal/external ringing calls,
Intercom Voice Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line Preference; calls that ring
are answered by lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the CO/IP line or a
LOOP button
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed
to ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may be assigned
allowing others to answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another user; if providing
call coverage for other users, you may also receive Station Call
Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls, etc. will recall if
left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the ICM Signaling
mode at the receiving phone; in Hands-free (HF) mode, after the splash
tone and announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In the
Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The ICM Signaling
mode can be assigned in Station Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available, the name of the
station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name Display.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and press the flashing Flex button (as needed), the
call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 In HF mode signaling, simply speak as normal into the microphone,
OR
 In PV mode signaling, lift the handset to respond.
7
LIP-7016D/7024D
3.2
User Guide
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive Muted Ring, CampOn tones, or Voice-Over announcements. Muted Ring is provided over
the speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You also may
receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on top of the existing call, as
an indication of another call waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to your phone. In
this case, audio is received from both the active call and the Voice Over
announcement at the same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of several ways; place
the existing call on Hold and respond to the new incoming call, activate
One-time DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button, and cannot be
sent to a SLT or other non-display terminal.
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to announce a call while
you are busy.
OPERATION
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press HOLD/SAVE and/or,
 Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
3.3
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can screen the call as
with a normal Answering Machine. The caller’s voice is played over
your speaker while the message is being recorded. There are two
methods of notification and call screening provided, Ring or Speaker
mode.
Ring mode(iPECS-Lik)/LED Blink mode(iPECS-MG)—the AME
(Answering Machine Emulation) Flex button will flash to notify you of a
call. You may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice
message is stored.
Speaker mode—when the call is sent to the voice mailbox, the caller’s
voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice mail to record a
message, talk with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox,
or answer the call and disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is
8
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
only available when using the iPECS VMIM/VSF Voice Mail; a
AME button are required.
MUTE
and
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To assign an AME button:
Ring Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 0 + HOLD/SAVE
Speaker Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 1 + HOLD/SAVE
To screen a call in Ring mode:
 Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over
the station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the Speaker
mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
 Press the illuminated SPEAKER button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail:
 Press the MUTE button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
 Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and the
Voice Mail disconnected.
In iPECS-MG
To assign an AME button:
LED Blink Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 524 + 1 + HOLD/SAVE
Speaker Hearing Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 2 + HOLD/SAVE
3.4
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be difficult to tell which
are ringing. The iPECS Phone has 14 Ring Tones available for
differentiating ring from one phone to another. Four of the tones are
stored in the phone’s permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are in
the system’s memory. Four of these ten can be downloaded into the
phone memory for use as the 5th to 8th Ring Tone.
OPERATION
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
9
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial tone number 0-9, tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial tone number 1-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.






3.5
Answering Calls
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to send ring signals
to external bells. You may answer these calls with Universal Answer
(UA).
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing during night mode over an external bell:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 567 (iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UA code).
3.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up (answer) the call.
Select to answer a call ringing at a specific station (Directed Call PickUp) or you may choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with the Group Call
Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station’s
Private Line unless the line appears on your phone.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the call will be
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
10
LIP-7016D/7024D
3.7
User Guide
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
When you need quiet, activate Do-Not-Disturb and the phone will block
incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast busy tone and the
display will show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy
(One-Time DND); DND will be active only for the duration of the present
call and requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded to the paired
Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate DND Override
and Intrude on an active call. The Attendants may also cancel DND at
other stations.
OPERATION
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 Press the DND button.
3.8
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the system.
Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF Voice Mail and External
Voice Mail. Your LCD and the LCD of the forward receiver will both
indicate the forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from a different station
(Call Forward, Remote). You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls, when the
station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may need to enter
your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a station with an
appearance of the Private Line or to Voice Mail.
OPERATION
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or internal
system resource:
11
LIP-7016D/7024D





User Guide
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Press the Fwd Soft button.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be forwarded from an
internal station or a remote location. You may define the conditions or
‘type of forward’ as listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station, except recalls,
when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a remote location, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote
location, you must access the system through a DISA enabled CO line.
12
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code 554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the type of forward code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
13
LIP-7016D/7024D








User Guide
Lift the handset,
Press FWD or dial 554,
Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
Dial your Authorization code (station number & Password),
Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
Dial Telephone number,
Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to return a ‘Text
Message’ to internal callers. When calling your Station, internal callers
will automatically receive the selected message or you can send a text
message you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24 characters.
Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text Messages; some allow
auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01: LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
Message 02: ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 04: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 05: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06: CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07: IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08: IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09: AT HOME
Message 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE
In iPECS-MG
1:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
2:
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
3:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
4:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
5:
OUT OF OFFICE
14
LIP-7016D/7024D
6:
7:
8:
9:
0:
*
#
User Guide
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactivate
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the Fwd Soft button.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, Refer to Station
Speed Dial Character entry chart
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (0-9),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 42,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
15
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
4. Placing a call
4.1
Internal Calls
4.1.1 Placing Intercom calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over the Intercom.
The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice Announce call, a splash tone will
be heard. Ring or Voice Announce is normally determined by settings
at the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’ after placing
the call. By changing the mode, a Voice Announce call will ring or a
ringing ICM call will allow Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp
Field (DSS/BLF). A DSS/BLF button lets you call the other station with a
single button press. The button LED displays the other station’s status,
ON, is busy, OFF is idle.
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another station or system
resource automatically. This Prime Line Preference may be immediate
or delayed allowing you to take other actions during the delay.
Otherwise, you may press another Flex button before going off-hook to
override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone will time-out and,
after receiving Howler Tone, your phone will be placed out-of-service in
Intercom Lock-Out. You must hang-up to return to an idle state.
OPERATION
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 On answer or Splash tone, speak to the called party.
4.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If your called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On, Callback or
Voice Over to the station. With Camp-On, wait off-hook for the called
station to answer. With Callback, the system will call you when the
busy station goes idle. After you answer, the system calls the
previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate Intrusion. You
may also use Step Call; dial the next station by dialing just the last digit
of the Intercom number.
OPERATION
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 Press * and await an answer.
16
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 Press CALL BACK and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, after splash-tone, speak.
4.1.3 Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode, you may leave a
Message Wait. The called user will receive a Message Wait indication;
the LED of the CALL BACK button will flash.
OPERATION
To activate Message Waiting:
 Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
4.2
External Calls
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’ are accessed
either by a button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a CO/IP line or by
dial codes. The CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls,
local, long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code, you will be
able to access any line from the group. A Flex button on the iPECS
Phone assigned as a LOOP button lets you access a line from a group.
Dial codes for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access—
Individual CO/IP line Access Code Line No
System
88
01-42
iPECS-50 & 100
001-200
iPECS-300
001-400
iPECS-600
001-600
iPECS-1200
88
01-80
iPECS-MG100
001-240
iPECS-MG300
CO/IP Group access—
CO/IP Group Access Code
801 – 820
801 – 872
8001 – 8200
801 – 824
801 - 872
17
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300 & 600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style signals, you may
activate Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing
for banking services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address using ‘*’ in place of
the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial will be analyzed
and the system will place the call on the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line Access Restrictions,
in which case you will receive error tone if you attempt to dial or access a
restricted number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may vary during Day
and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before placing calls, in
which case you will receive a second dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time Restrictions, you will
receive a Call Warning Tone prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency
numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station in the
System, regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
OPERATION
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/Dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you will receive an All
Trunks Busy signal. You may request to be notified when a line becomes
free.
OPERATION
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line button,
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line comes
available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
18
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to track calls for billing
or other purposes. You may enter an Account Code, which is output
from the system to a printer in the SMDR report. You must have an
Account Code Flex button, see Assigning features to Flex buttons.
OPERATION
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *.
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating Temporary COS,
which will disable all dialing from the phone. To deactivate Temporary
COS you must enter the station’s Authorization code.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 21 (User Program code),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 22 (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 31,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
19
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 32,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by activating Walking COS.
The Walking COS dialing restriction levels are applied for a single call
only. For multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS or
use the Flash button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 23 (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 33,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
4.3
Using Automated Dialing
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is automatically saved in the
Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer. For users of an iPECS Display
Phone, the system will store the numbers dialed on the last ten calls.
OPERATION
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select the Redial Soft button,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select from the last 10 numbers dialed,
 Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
20
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
NOTE—Press the Next Soft button to view the previously dialed
number.
4.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call to the Save
Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing at a later time. The Save
Number is stored until you save new number.
OPERATION
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press
SPEED
twice.
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 200-999), for iPECS-MG 100(2000-2999).
The
iPECS-300 & 600, iPECS-MG 300 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999). You may, if
allowed, use System Speed Dial to call frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups called System
Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you may access some numbers
and not others and your dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
OPERATION
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for iPECS100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 & 600, 2000-2999 for iPECSMG100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-MG300).
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Your iPECS Phone has access to 20 or 100 Station Speed Dial
numbers. For users in an iPECS-100, 20 Station Speed Dial numbers
(bins 00~19) are available. The iPECS-300 & 600 support 100 Station
Speed Dial numbers (bins (000~099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each
21
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-49) You can easily
program each speed dial bin with telephone numbers, up to 48 digits, to
meet your needs.
The numbers may include several ‘special’
instructions:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
FLASH as 1st digit—Activate dial tone detect.
FLASH not as 1st digit—The system will generate a flash on the
CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1 digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad Facility
message.
‘*’ as 1st digit—Display Security, the stored number will not be
displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover, the system will
switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may be associated
with the number for Dial by Name. Characters are entered with two
keystrokes as in the chart below.
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 – 60
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
0-00
#
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 – 30
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 – 90
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
1Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000-099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
22
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number to be stored,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the alpha-numeric entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Select the Tel Num Soft button,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-49).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Dial the CO/IP line/group code,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the alpha-numeric entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial 1 for NUMBER,
 Dial the CO/IP line/group code,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,





4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name
Dial by Name employs three ‘Directories’: Intercom, User or Station
Speed Dial, and System Speed Dial.
23
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To allow others to contact you via the Intercom directory, you must enter
a name for your station, up to 12 characters.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press SPEED twice,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Intercom, 2: User Speed Dial, 3:
System Speed Dial, the LCD displays the first two names, in
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using ▼ VOLUME ▲. To enter search characters, refer to the
Character Entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 74,
 Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to the Character Entry chart in
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press DIR ,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Station Speed Dial, 2: System Speed
Dial, 3: Station Name, the LCD displays the first two names, in
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using ▼ VOLUME ▲ . To enter search characters, refer to the
Character Entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 12,
 Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to the Character Entry chart in
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6 ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered
When making an external call and a busy signal is received, the system
can be set to retry the number until the call is connected, the feature is
cancelled, or the maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
24
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker then place the call
with the microphone muted. When the remote end answers, you must
select the Speak Soft button or lift the handset. Either of these actions
will cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the remote party.
OPERATION
To set up an ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu and select the
ACNR Soft button,
 Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
 Press the ACNR Soft button.
25
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
5. Transfer, Conference & Other Call Handling
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other resource of the
system, Call Transfer. You can screen the transfer with the receiving
party (Screened Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in Transfer Hold, will
receive MOH and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or DND, it may
immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
OPERATION
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call receiving party,
 For Unscreened Call Transfer, hang-up,
 For Screened Call Transfer, at answer or Splash tone, announce
call.
5.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one of several
holding states. In System Hold, other non-restricted stations may pickup the call. In Exclusive Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the
call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System or Exclusive).
You may override this Hold Preference by pressing the HOLD/SAVE
button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates for the holding
station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a DSS/BLF button that
will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then recall the user.
This Hold Recall is provided with a different ring signal. If not
answered in a timely manner, the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold
Recall.
OPERATION
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
26
LIP-7016D/7024D
5.3
User Guide
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on Hold, placing the
active call on Hold acting as a broker between two or more parties,
Broker Call. iPECS Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to
the number of CO/IP line buttons.
OPERATION
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
5.4
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3 parties (iPECS-Lik)/13
Party (iPECS-MG), or 24 parties when using a Multi-Party Conference
Interface Module (MCIM). The other parties in the Conference may be
internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2 external parties in a
private conversation. This is an Unsupervised Conference, which is
not subject to the normal Hold Recall operation.
OPERATION
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Select the Conf Soft button,
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Select the Conf Soft button,
 Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Select the Conf Soft button.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Select the Conf Soft button.
27
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9 Conference Rooms
can be set up letting up to 24 parties converse when using a MCIM
(iPECS-Lik) and up to 12 parties(iPECS-MG).. When setting up a
Conference Room, a password can be designated for invited parties
(internal and external parties) to use for accessing the established
Conference Room.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room password.
28
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
5.5
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special holding location
(Park Orbit), which can be accessed easily from any station in the
system. Typically, this feature is used with Paging to notify the desired
user of a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call Park timer.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601-619 for iPECS300 & 600),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit.
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541)
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541).
 Dial the Park number(00-49).
29
LIP-7016D/7024D
5.6
User Guide
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your Voice Mail Box.
OPERATION
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu and select the
Record Soft button, record warning tone is heard and recording
starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select the
Record Soft button or,
 Hang-up, return to idle.
30
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
6. Get Your Messages & Send SMS
The iPECS Phone allows you to send and receive several types of
messages. These are accessed via the Message Summary Display,
and described in the following paragraphs:
In iPECS-Lik
1: ST—Station Message Wait
2: CL—CLI Message Wait
3: VS—VSF Message Wait
4: VM—Commercial Voice Mail
5: FS—Feature server
6: MS—SMS message wait
In iPECS-MG
1: MWI—Message Wait Indication,
2: VMS—VMIB Message.
3: SMS—SMS Message.
6.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting indication when
you do not answer or your phone is in DND. A flashing MSG LED on
the iPECS Phone indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification,
a Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may review
and delete messages as well as respond with a call back.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To review your Station messages:
 Press the CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message Summary
display,
ST CL VS VM
FS
MS
001 001 005 006 001
004
 Dial 1 to view Station messages,
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press the SAVE button.
To delete the Station Message Wait:
 Dial ‘*’, and press 1.
31
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To delete all Station Message Waits:
 Dial ‘#’, and press 1.
In iPECS-MG
To review your Station messages:
 Press CALL BACK , the LCD shows the Message Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00)
SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)
 Dial 1 to view the Station messages,
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press SAVE button to return the call from the current message.
6.2
Responding to a CLI Message indication
When external calls to your phone are not answered and Caller
Identification is provided from the network, a Calling Line Id. (CLI)
message is logged. You may review, delete or return these messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press the flashing CLI MESSAGE button, the first CLI message
information is displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CLI message wait information.
To review CLI Messages using the Summary Display:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
ST CL VS VM
FS
MS
001 001 005 006 001
004
 Dial 2, the first CLI message information is displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CLI message wait information.
To delete the current CLI Message:
 Dial ‘*’ button, the next CLI message is displayed.
To delete all CLI Messages:
 Press SPEED ,
 Press * twice.
32
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To respond to the current CLI message with a call:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press LOG button of 3 soft key or the CALL LOG button, the Call
Log message information is displayed,
 Press Navigation Up/Down Key or ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through Log
message wait information.(M means the missed call and  means
the answered call).
01 M 101
02  100
To return the current CLI message:
Press HOLD/SAVE .
6.3
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail Box, they can
leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail Box is part of the integrated
VMIM/VSF module, the iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and management of the
received voice messages. While in your Mail Box, you have control of
your password and Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely
control Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF. You will need
to register an Authorization Code for your station to access the
VMIM/VSF Voice messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
 Press the VOICE MAIL Flex button,
 Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
33
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
ST CL VS VM
FS
MS
001 001 005 006 001
004
 Dial 3 for VMIM/VSF, 4 for external VM or 5 for Feature Server
Voice Mail,
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered by the
VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 At answer, dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
In iPECS-MG
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
 Press the VM access button or dial 523(VMIB access code),
 Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the display,
MWI (01) VMS (00)
SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)
 Dial 2 for VMIM
 After the prompt enter your station number and password, to receive
the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompts sequentially,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer, dial 523(VMIB Access code) to receive ‘Mail Box &
Password’ prompt,
34
LIP-7016D/7024D


6.4
User Guide
Dial the Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the
‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes, then hang-up
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (max. 100 alphanumeric
characters) with other iPECS display Phone users. These messages
will activate the CALL BACK button LED and are displayed on the iPECS
Phone LCD.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display Phone:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 36 (SMS send code),
 Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a new or edit an
existing message,
 Enter the station range to receive the message, to send to a single
station enter the station number twice,
 Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each character,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
ST CL VS VM
FS
MS
001 001 005 006 001
004
 Dial 6, the first two SMS messages are shown in brief,
 Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
 Press the # key,
 Dial 1 to delete the message, 2 to cancel or 3 to delete all received
Short text messages.
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display phone user:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 43 (SMS send code),
35
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Dial the station number to receive the message
Press HOLD/SAVE.
Enter your message using 2 key strokes for each character, see
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00) SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)






Dial 3 (retrieve SMS), the first two SMS messages display in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
36
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
7. Remote System Access
7.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote users to gain access
to the system’s resources. The system will recognize remote user
dialed inputs (call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc). Remote users may be required to enter an
Authorization Code.
OPERATION
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Await answer and dial your authorization code (station number and
password),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
7.2
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and receive iPECS
calls on a registered mobile phone. You may need to activate the
Mobile Phone Extension feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is only effective with an ISDN CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37,
 Dial the mobile phone number,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 38,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
37
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,
NOTE—The mobile may reconnect to the transfer by pressing the #
key.
In iPECS-MG
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 51.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2.
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by
pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
38
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
8. Miscellaneous Features
8.1
Call Log
User’s can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed calls on the
display. A Flex button assigned as a CALL LOG button provides simple
access to incoming (Called), dialed (outgoing) and lost (missed) calls.
OPERATION
iPECS Phone
In iPECS-Lik
To assign a CALL LOG button:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button
 Press the desired FLEX button
 Press the TRANS/PGM button
 Dial 57
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To access the Call Log menu;
 Press the CALL LOG button.
STATION 101 (T)
14 SUN 04
CALLED DIALED

Using the Soft keys, select the desired call log (incoming, outgoing,
or missed).
STATION 101 (T)
14 SUN 04
PREV
NEXT

14:30
LOST
14:30
SEND
Use Prev and Next soft keys to view the log contents.
In iPECS-MG
To assign a CALL LOG button:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button
 Press the desired FLEX button
 Dial 1 for NUMBER
 Dial 685 (Call Log feature code)
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
39
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To access the Call Log menu;
 Press LOG button of 3 soft key or Press the
CALL LOG
button.
STATION 101 (T)
14 SUN 04
14:30
LOG
DIR
REDIAL

Using the Soft keys, select the desired call log (incoming, outgoing,
or missed).
>01  101
02  4504600
SEND
SELECT




8.2
EXIT
Use Navi Up and Down keys to view the log contents.
 Outgoing Call
 Incoming Call
M Missed Call
Background Music and Music on Hold
Two audio sources can be connected to the system. These sources or
an internal source provide input for Background Music (BGM) and Music
On Hold (MOH). In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can
be used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS Phone when
the station is idle. MOH is played to callers placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
NOTE—BGM is not supported in iPECS-MG.
OPERATION
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
8.3
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other stations and/or
external speakers. Stations are assigned to one or more of the Internal
40
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Page Zones. The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
Page Zone codes in iPECS-Lik are:
1: Internal Page Zones
iPECS 100: 501-510
iPECS 300 & 600: 501-535
2: Internal All Call Page
543
3: External Page Zones
545-546
4: External All Call Page
548
5: All Call Page
549
Page Zone codes in iPECS-MG are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15 ) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page
543 + 00
External Page Zone
548
All Call Page
549
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to be recalled when
their turn comes in the queue. Users can also request a paged party
answer the Page using Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party
may answer the page from any phone in the system by dialing the MeetMe code.
OPERATION
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received:
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial 544 544 (iPECS-Lik)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page code).
8.4
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. Users separately login or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned.
41
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Once logged in, place or receive one-way page announcements to/from
other users who are logged in to the same PTT group.
OPERATION
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG),
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
 After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
8.5
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the system. The
alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset, BGM will be
provided.
OPERATION
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 41(iPECS-Lik)/13(iPECS-MG),
 Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
 For a daily (repeating alarm), dial #,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 42(iPECS-Lik)/14(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
8.6
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a unique Alarm
Ring signal and LCD display may be received. To restart the monitor
circuit, the external contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring
signal terminated.
42
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst) may be received
each time the external contact is activated. A system contact also can
be assigned to act as a Door Open contact.
OPERATION
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565.
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS -300 & 600.
—Contacts 1 is available in the iPECS -MG.
8.7
Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation may be provided
with back-up batteries or Power Fail Transfer (PFT). When battery
back-up is provided the station will operate normally. When PFT is
implemented, an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service while power is
out.
8.8
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several Voice Memos to
provide Station Users with general information such as station number,
date, time, and feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
43
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
OPERATION
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (661 for iPECS-100 or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600 , 675-1 for iPECS-MG), date and time memo is
heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (662 for iPECS-100 or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600 , 675-2 for iPECS-MG), the station number memo
is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (663 for iPECS-100 or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600 , 675-3 for iPECS-MG), Station Status Memo is
heard.
8.9
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot Desk operation.
These Hot Desk phones let you log-on and use the Hot Desk phone as if
it were your station. Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on
the attributes assigned to your station number and you can make calls
as normal. When logged-out, calls to your station number are forward
to the destination you chose.
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial “* 0” (iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Dial your Authorization Code (station number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial * twice (iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Use the ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select a call forward destination for your
calls, speed dial, joined mobile phone, VMIM/VSF, or VM group,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
44
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
9. Working with PBX, Centrex & ISDN features
9.1
Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host PBX system or
Centrex services from your service provider. The iPECS connects to
such a host with analog CO lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an extension of the host,
allowing access to the host system features using the host dial codes.
While on a call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to other
host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to regain dial tone
from the CO line without relinquishing control of the CO line to place
another call.
OPERATION
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select the
Flash soft button,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
9.2
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services requires that dialed
digits be sent to the ISDN as data and not tones. In this case, dialed
digits are sent as ‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the Flex Button
program procedures. Once active, dial into the ISDN for services;
however, actions other than dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility
operation.
OPERATION
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
45
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar to those of
Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary services are provided on a
subscription basis and, as with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash
button on an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be placed on Hold and a
second call placed on the line. You may then alternate between the two
held calls (Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line conference
can be established using the FLASH and CONF buttons. The conference
can also be placed on hold.
OPERATION
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary services:
 Press FLASH ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , CONF , or CO line button to activate the desired
feature.
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of Caller ID to the farend. This may be a subscription service of your carrier. Separate Flex
buttons are required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL), and
incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
OPERATION
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR/COLR button and place the call.
46
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
10. Setting Features & Flex buttons
10.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users to assign certain
attributes such as Authorization Codes (Passwords). After entering the
User Program mode, you dial the codes to select the attribute and
setting. Once selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input required are given in
Appendix B. In some cases, you enter these codes as part of Flex
button assignments.
OPERATION
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex buttons on your
iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex
buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features providing One-Touch
feature activation (e.g., a Flex button may be assigned to access the
Account Code feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—enter station number,
Speed Dial—enter Station/System Speed dial bin number,
Flex Numbering Plan—enter Flex Numbering Plan code (refer to
Appendix A),
User Program Code—press TRANS/PGM and enter a User Program
code (refer to Appendix B)
CO/IP Line—enter the CO/IP line or group number.
OPERATION
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program codes
Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
47
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
11. Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-Lik
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
Answering Machine Emulation
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
562
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
562
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
562
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
48
iPECS600
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620659
66
601619
620667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
iPECS600
*66
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Extension code
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
49
SLT use
only
620-667
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
Individual CO/IP Line Access
Remark
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
number
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
& 600
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
PTT Group Login/Logout
#0
#0
iPECS600
Remark
#0
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Code
Name
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Station Group
Remark
100 ~ 4xx
Number
2) Feature Code
No
Code
Feature Name
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group #
548
50
554 + Type +
LIP-7016D/7024D
No
User Guide
Code
Feature Name
Remark
Destination
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
51
514 + Type +
Destination
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
001 ~ 200: MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
LIP-7016D/7024D
No
User Guide
Code
Feature Name
Remark
*: Log out
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
52
527 + Conf. Room
#
528 + Conf. Room
#
529 + HH:MM
LIP-7016D/7024D
No
79
User Guide
Code
Feature Name
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
53
Remark
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
12. Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-Lik
Code Function
10
11 x
12 x
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
( X = 1-2 )
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
Remarks
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
32
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
61 x
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
SLT
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay (09)
Select download Ring Tone
0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Yes
Yes
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Yes
Input time, 24 hour clock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
54
Yes
Yes
Yes
LIP-7016D/7024D
User Guide
Code Function
Remarks
SLT
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
70
Input up to 7 characters
Yes
7*
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
Display Soft Message
Display Serial number/Package
for SMEMU
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
*0
**
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
In iPECS-MG
User
PGM Code
Requires VSF/External SMDI
VM
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Description
Remark
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
55
00-14
LIP-7016D/7024D
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
Set Pre-defined Message.
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
56
LIP-7024LD
Users Guide
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1
1.1 General............................................................................................ 1
1.2 Feature Information ......................................................................... 1
1.3 Feature Groupings .......................................................................... 1
1.4 iPECS LIP-7024LD Phone Description ........................................... 2
2.
IPECS PHONE LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES .................... 5
2.1 LCD Operation ................................................................................ 5
2.2 Using the Speakerphone................................................................. 6
2.3 Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset............................................... 7
3. RECEIVING CALLS ..................................................................................... 8
3.1 Answering a Call While Idle............................................................. 8
3.2 Responding to a Call While Busy.................................................... 8
3.3 Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) .................................. 9
3.4 Differential Ring Signals ...............................................................10
3.5 Answering Calls............................................................................11
3.6 Answering Calls to Other Stations ...............................................11
3.7 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls .................11
3.8 Forwarding Calls ..........................................................................12
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail .............12
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number.............................13
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message ...............................15
4. PLACING A CALL ................................................................................... 17
4.1 Internal Calls ................................................................................17
4.1.1 Placing Intercom calls ........................................................17
4.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station .....................17
4.1.3 Leaving a Message Wait....................................................18
4.2 External Calls ...............................................................................18
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls ..........................................18
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line ...........................19
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing.............20
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ........................................20
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ..........21
4.3 Using Automated Dialing..............................................................21
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ......................................21
4.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial ..............................22
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers...................................22
i
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers..............23
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name ...................25
4.3.6 ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered ... 26
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING ............................. 27
5.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ................27
5.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state....................................27
5.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls.....................................28
5.4 Joining Multiple People in a Conference......................................28
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room............................................. 29
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page........................................ 30
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call................................................. 31
6. GET YOUR MESSAGES & SEND SMS .........................................................32
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication..................... 32
6.2 Responding to a CLI Message indication........................................ 33
6.3 Getting Voice Mail Messages.......................................................... 34
6.4 Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ................................ 35
7. USING THE DISPLAY MENU ........................................................................37
7.1 Ez Menu(iPECS-Lik) ....................................................................... 38
7.2 Phone Book(iPECS-Lik) .................................................................. 38
7.3 Schedule(iPECS-Lik)....................................................................... 39
7.4 Customize(iPECS-Lik)..................................................................... 39
7.5 Setting(iPECS-Lik) .......................................................................... 40
7.6 Voice Mail(iPECS-Lik) ..................................................................... 40
7.7 User Organizer (iPECS-MG) ........................................................... 41
7.8 Phone Book (iPECS-MG)................................................................ 41
7.9 Ring/BGM (iPECS-MG)................................................................... 41
7.10 COS/Password (iPECS-MG)........................................................... 41
7.11 Multi Message (iPECS-MG) ............................................................ 41
7.12 Mobile Ext/Conference Room (iPECS-MG) .................................... 42
7.13 Speaker/Headset (iPECS-MG) ....................................................... 42
7.14 Station ICLID (iPECS-MG) .............................................................. 42
7.15 Keyset Information (iPECS-MG) ..................................................... 42
7.16 System Information (iPECS-MG) .................................................... 42
8. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS .........................................................................43
8.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA).............................................. 43
8.2 Mobile Phone Extension.................................................................. 43
9. MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES ......................................................................45
9.1 Background Music and Music on Hold............................................ 45
9.2 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ................................ 45
9.3 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page ............................................................... 46
ii
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
9.4 Wake-Up Alarm ............................................................................... 47
9.5 Alarm/Door Bell ............................................................................... 47
9.6 Power Fail Transfer ......................................................................... 48
9.7 System Voice Memo ....................................................................... 48
9.8 Hot Desk.......................................................................................... 49
10. WORKING WITH PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ...................................50
10.1 Access PBX or Centrex features..................................................... 50
10.2 Access the ISDN Network ............................................................... 50
10.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features............... 50
10.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services ................................... 51
10.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction.................................... 51
11. SETTING FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS........................................................52
11.1 Entering Station Program Data ....................................................... 52
11.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ................................................ 52
12. APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ................................................53
13. APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ......................................................59
iii
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced-technology, highly-versatile,
fully-featured telecom system designed to make office communications
easy and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data converge on a single IP
packet network. Because each iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can
be moved easily throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide simple and
straightforward. The guide starts with the simpler operations of the
iPECS Phone Speakerphone, moves on to receiving and placing calls,
and then to more advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step operations.
The operations shown in this guide use the system’s base default
Numbering Plan. Your Numbering Plan may be different. Some
features may not be available for you to access or may be subject to
certain limitations based on the set-up of the system.
Under certain operation conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon
to make emergency calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for
access to the emergency services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a logical and
consistent sequence so that features can be quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving Calls, Placing Calls
etc. Within each group, features are arranged according to the difficulty
of operation and frequency of use.
1
LIP-7024LD
1.4
User Guide
iPECS LIP-7024LD Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-7024LD Phones incorporate the latest in VoIP
technology and user interface to provide you with a cost effective, simple
to use, productive communications tool. It includes a large 9-line 32character per line LCD. The bottom line of the display is an interactive
menu accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just below the display. The
Navigation button in the lower center of the Phone allows you to move
through the menu choices when more than three selections are available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed either using the
Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting a menu item using the Soft
buttons. In the remainder of this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible
buttons are shown with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double underline.
iPECS LIP-7024LD
2
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Interactive
LCD
Handset
3 Soft buttons
Speaker
Dial pad
Flex buttons
Fixed
Feature
buttons:
Speaker
Hold/Save
Speed
Trans/Pgm
Dnd
Call Back
Volume
Navigation
button
iPECS LIP-7024LD Diagram
3
Microphone
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
iPECS
Phone
headset jack
iPECS Phone
LAN connection
iPECS Phone
to PC
connection
iPECS Phone
Handset jack
connection
iPECS LIP-7024LD Connections
4
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
2. iPECS Phone LCD, Speakerphone & Related Features
2.1
LCD Operation
The iPECS-7024LD has a large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) which is
divided into to three sections. The upper section, while idle, displays
various icons and a monthly calendar. The middle section consists of 2
lines which are used to convey information to you. They provide date,
time and station number display while idle. It will also provide
called/calling name/number display, feature status, etc. The lower
section, which consists of a single line, is an interactive menu to guide
you through feature access and User Program selections.
With the Menu Navigation button you can activate and be presented with
the Display Menu, section 7.
5
LIP-7024LD
2.2
User Guide
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except for Paging) in
place of lifting the handset to receive or place calls. Place calls using
On-hook dialing with the Speakerphone.
In addition, you may switch between the handset and Speakerphone
during a call. By keeping the handset Off-hook, the Group Listen
feature is activated, which provides incoming audio over the speaker with
outgoing audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to listen to
both sides of the conversation without interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute the microphone
using the Mute Soft button. When Mute is active, the Mute Soft button
toggles to Speak, which is used to turn off Mute.
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a feature by pressing
its button will activate the Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the ON/OFF-hook
state for the phone.
OPERATION
To activate the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
 Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook with audio from the speaker
and to microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button.
To Mute the microphone:
 Select the Mute Soft button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):
 Press the Speak Soft button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:
 Press the SPEAKER button.
6
LIP-7024LD
2.3
User Guide
Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset
The iPECS LIP-7024LD may be equipped with the BTU (Bluetooth Unit)
option that lets you use a Wireless headset such as a Jabra BT-200, BT250 or Plantronics M3000. Using a headset permits you to move freely
around the phone within approximately 10 meters and maintain a
conversation. Before using the headset, the headset must be “paired”
with the BTU, and then the headset must be enabled for use. Operation
of the iPECS LIP-7024LD with the headset is the same as with the
Speakerphone; merely use the Speaker button to go ON and OFF-hook.
NOTE—during the pairing operation, the headset and phone should
be as close as possible but not more than 1 meter apart.
OPERATION
To pair the wireless headset to the BTU:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 3,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To enable/disable the wireless headset:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 4,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To unpair the headset:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 3,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
7
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
3. Receiving calls
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls; internal/external ringing calls,
Intercom Voice Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line Preference; calls that ring
are answered by lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the CO/IP line or a
LOOP button
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed
to ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may be assigned
allowing others to answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another user; if providing
call coverage for other users, you may also receive Station Call
Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls, etc. will recall if
left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the ICM Signaling
mode at the receiving phone; in Hands-free (HF) mode, after the splash
tone and announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In the
Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The ICM Signaling
mode can be assigned in Station Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available, the name of the
station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name Display.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and press the flashing Flex button (as needed), the
call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 In HF mode signaling, simply speak as normal into the microphone,
OR
 In PV mode signaling, lift the handset to respond.
3.2
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive Muted Ring, CampOn tones, or Voice-Over announcements. Muted Ring is provided over
the speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You also may
receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on top of the existing call, as
an indication of another call waiting.
8
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to your phone. In
this case, audio is received from both the active call and the Voice Over
announcement at the same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of several ways; place
the existing call on Hold and respond to the new incoming call, activate
One-time DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button, and cannot be sent
to a SLT or other non-display terminal.
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to announce a call while
you are busy.
OPERATION
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press HOLD/SAVE and/or,
 Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
3.3
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can screen the call as
with a normal Answering Machine. The caller’s voice is played over
your speaker while the message is being recorded. There are two
methods of notification and call screening provided, Ring or Speaker
mode.
Ring mode(iPECS-Lik)/LED Blink mode(iPECS-MG)—the AME
(Answering Machine Emulation) Flex button will flash to notify you of a
call. You may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice
message is stored.
Speaker mode—when the call is sent to the voice mailbox, the caller’s
voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice mail to record a
message, talk with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox,
or answer the call and disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is
only available when using the iPECS VMIM/VSF Voice Mail; a MUTE and
AME button are required.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
9
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To assign an AME button:
Ring Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 0 + HOLD/SAVE
Speaker Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 1 + HOLD/SAVE
To screen a call in Ring mode:
 Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over the
station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the Speaker
mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
 Press the illuminated SPEAKER button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail:
 Press the Mute Soft button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
 Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and the
Voice Mail disconnected.
In iPECS-MG
To assign an AME button:
LED Blink Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 524 + 1 + HOLD/SAVE
Speaker Hearing Mode –
 TRANS/PGM + FLEX + 564 + 2 + HOLD/SAVE
3.4
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be difficult to tell which
are ringing. The iPECS Phone has 14 Ring Tones available for
differentiating ring from one phone to another. Four of the tones are
stored in the phone’s permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are in
the system’s memory. Four of these ten can be downloaded into the
phone memory for use as the 5th to 8th Ring Tone.
OPERATION
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
 Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
 Dial tone number 0-9, tone is heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
10
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial tone number 1-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
3.5
Answering Calls
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to send ring signals
to external bells. You may answer these calls with Universal Answer
(UA).
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing during night mode over an external bell:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial567 (iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UA code).
3.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up (answer) the call.
Select to answer a call ringing at a specific station (Directed Call PickUp) or you may choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with the Group Call
Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station’s
Private Line unless the line appears on your phone.
OPERATION
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the call will be
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
3.7
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
When you need quiet, activate Do-Not-Disturb and the phone will block
incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast busy tone and the
11
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
display will show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy
(One-Time DND); DND will be active only for the duration of the present
call and requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded to the paired
Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate DND Override
and Intrude on an active call. The Attendants may also cancel DND at
other stations.
OPERATION
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 Press the DND button.
3.8
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the system.
Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF Voice Mail and External
Voice Mail. Your LCD and the LCD of the forward receiver will both
indicate the forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from a different station
(Call Forward, Remote). You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls, when the
station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may need to enter
your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a station with an
appearance of the Private Line or to Voice Mail.
OPERATION
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or internal
system resource:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
12
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Dial the destination number.
Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Lift the handset.
 Press the Fwd Soft button.
 Dial #.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.


3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be forwarded from an
internal station or a remote location. You may define the conditions or
‘type of forward’ as listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station, except recalls,
when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, when
the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a remote location, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote
location, you must access the system through a DISA enabled CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
13
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Press SPEED ,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code 554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the type of forward code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.






In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external number)
from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial Telephone number,
14
LIP-7024LD


User Guide
Press HOLD/SAVE (iPECS-MG)
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to return a ‘Text
Message’ to internal callers. When calling your Station, internal callers
will automatically receive the selected message or you can send a text
message you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24 characters.
Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text Messages; some allow
auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01: LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
Message 02: ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 04: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 05: OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06: CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07: IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08: IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09: AT HOME
Message 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE
In iPECS-MG
1:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
2:
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
3:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
4:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
5:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
6:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
7:
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
8:
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
9:
AT HOME
15
LIP-7024LD
0:
*
#
User Guide
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactivate
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Press #.
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward canceled.
Or,
 Press the Fwd Soft button.
 Press #, forward canceled.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, Refer to Station
Speed Dial Character entry chart
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (0-9),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 42,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , message saved.
16
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
4. Placing a call
4.1
Internal Calls
4.1.1 Placing Intercom calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over the Intercom.
The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice Announce call, a splash tone will
be heard. Ring or Voice Announce is normally determined by settings
at the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’ after placing
the call. By changing the mode, a Voice Announce call will ring or a
ringing ICM call will allow Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp
Field (DSS/BLF). A DSS/BLF button lets you call the other station with a
single button press. The button LED displays the other station’s status,
ON, is busy, OFF is idle.
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another station or system
resource automatically. This Prime Line Preference may be immediate
or delayed allowing you to take other actions during the delay.
Otherwise, you may press another Flex button before going off-hook to
override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone will time-out and,
after receiving Howler Tone, your phone will be placed out-of-service in
Intercom Lock-Out. You must hang-up to return to an idle state.
OPERATION
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 On answer or Splash tone, speak to the called party.
4.1.2 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If your called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On, Callback or
Voice Over to the station. With Camp-On, wait off-hook for the called
station to answer. With Callback, the system will call you when the
busy station goes idle. After you answer, the system calls the
previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate Intrusion. You
may also use Step Call; dial the next station by dialing just the last digit
of the Intercom number.
OPERATION
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
17
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
 Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 Press CALL BACK and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, after splash-tone, speak.
4.1.3 Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode, you may leave a
Message Wait. The called user will receive a Message Wait indication;
the LED of the CALL BACK button will flash.
OPERATION
To activate Message Waiting:
 Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
4.2
External Calls
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’ are accessed
either by a button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a CO/IP line or by
dial codes. The CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls,
local, long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code, you will be
able to access any line from the group. A Flex button on the iPECS
Phone assigned as a LOOP button lets you access a line from a group.
Dial codes for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access —
Individual CO/IP line Access Code
88
88
CO/IP Group access—
CO/IP Group Access Code
801 – 820
801 – 872
Line No
01-42
001-200
001-400
001-600
01-80
001-240
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300 & 600
18
System
iPECS-50 & 100
iPECS-300
iPECS-600
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
LIP-7024LD
8001 – 8200
801 – 824
801 - 872
Any CO/IP Line access —
9
User Guide
iPECS-1200
iPECS-MG100
iPECS-MG300
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style signals, you may
activate Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing
for banking services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address using ‘*’ in place of
the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial will be analyzed
and the system will place the call on the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line Access Restrictions,
in which case you will receive error tone if you attempt to dial or access a
restricted number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may vary during Day
and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before placing calls, in
which case you will receive a second dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time Restrictions, you will
receive a Call Warning Tone prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency
numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station in the
System, regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
OPERATION
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/Dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you will receive an All
Trunks Busy signal. You may request to be notified when a line becomes
free.
OPERATION
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line button,
 Press the CALL BACK button,
19
LIP-7024LD

User Guide
Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line comes
available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to track calls for billing
or other purposes. You may enter an Account Code, which is output
from the system to a printer in the SMDR report. You must have an
Account Code Flex button, see Assigning features to Flex buttons.
OPERATION
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *.
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating Temporary COS,
which will disable all dialing from the phone. To deactivate Temporary
COS you must enter the station’s Authorization code.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 21 (User Program code),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 22 (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To activate Temporary COS:
20
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program code 31,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 32,
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .



4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by activating Walking COS.
The Walking COS dialing restriction levels are applied for a single call
only. For multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS or
use the Flash button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 23,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program code 33,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
4.3
Using Automated Dialing
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is automatically saved in the
Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer. For users of an iPECS Display
Phone, the system will store the numbers dialed on the last ten calls.
OPERATION
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
21
LIP-7024LD



User Guide
Select the Redial Soft button,
Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select from the last 10 numbers dialed,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
NOTE—Press the Next Soft button to view the previously dialed
number.
4.3.2 Using and Entering Save Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call to the Save
Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing at a later time. The Save
Number is stored until you save new number.
OPERATION
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press
SPEED
twice.
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800 System Speed
Dial numbers (bins 200-999), for iPECS-MG 100(2000-2999).
The
iPECS-300 & 600, iPECS-MG 300 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999). You may, if
allowed, use System Speed Dial to call frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups called System
Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you may access some numbers
and not others and your dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
OPERATION
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for iPECS100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 & 600, 2000-2999 for iPECS-MG100,
2000-4999 for iPECS-MG300).
22
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Your iPECS Phone has access to 20 or 100 Station Speed Dial
numbers. For users in an iPECS-100, 20 Station Speed Dial numbers
(bins 00~19) are available. The iPECS-300 & 600 support 100 Station
Speed Dial numbers (bins (000~099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each
support 50 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-49). You can easily
program each speed dial bin with telephone numbers, up to 48 digits, to
meet your needs.
The numbers may include several ‘special’
instructions:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
FLASH as 1st digit—Activate dial tone detect.
FLASH not as 1st digit—The system will generate a flash on the
CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1
digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad Facility
message.
‘*’ as 1st digit—Display Security, the stored number will not be
displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover, the system will
switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may be associated
with the number for Dial by Name. Characters are entered with two
keystrokes as in the chart below.
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
*1 Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
0-00
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
#
Character Entry
23
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000-099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the alpha-numeric entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Select the Tel Num Soft button,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the Character Entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-49).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Dial the CO/IP line/group code,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name if desired, using the alpha-numeric entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
24
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial 1 for NUMBER,
 Dial the CO/IP line/group code,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering your Name
Dial by Name employs three ‘Directories’: Intercom, User or Station
Speed Dial, and System Speed Dial.
To allow others to contact you via the Intercom directory, you must enter
a name for your station, up to 12 characters.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press SPEED twice,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Intercom, 2: User Speed Dial, 3:
System Speed Dial, the LCD displays the first two names, in
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using ▼ VOLUME ▲ . To enter search characters, refer to the
Character Entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 74,
 Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to the Character Entry chart in
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press DIR ,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Station Speed Dial, 2: System Speed
Dial, 3: Station Name, the LCD displays the first two names, in
alphabetical order,
 Scroll using ▼ VOLUME ▲ . To enter search characters, refer to the
Character Entry chart in section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
25
LIP-7024LD




User Guide
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 12,
Dial name, up to 12 characters (refer to the Character Entry chart in
section 4.3.4,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6 ACNR: To retry a busy external number until answered
When making an external call and a busy signal is received, the system
can be set to retry the number until the call is connected, the feature is
cancelled, or the maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker then place the call
with the microphone muted. When the remote end answers, you must
select the Speak Soft button or lift the handset. Either of these actions
will cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the remote party.
OPERATION
To set up an ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu and select the
ACNR Soft button,
 Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
 Press the ACNR Soft button.
26
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
5. Transfer, Conference & Other Call Handling
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other resource of the
system, Call Transfer. You can screen the transfer with the receiving
party (Screened Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in Transfer Hold, will
receive MOH and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or DND, it may
immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
OPERATION
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call receiving party,
 For Unscreened Call Transfer, hang-up,
 For Screened Call Transfer, at answer or Splash tone, announce call.
5.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one of several
holding states. In System Hold, other non-restricted stations may pickup the call. In Exclusive Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the
call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System or Exclusive).
You may override this Hold Preference by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button
twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates for the holding
station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a DSS/BLF button that will
place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then recall the user.
This Hold Recall is provided with a different ring signal. If not
answered in a timely manner, the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold
Recall.
OPERATION
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
27
LIP-7024LD
5.3
User Guide
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on Hold, placing the
active call on Hold acting as a broker between two or more parties,
Broker Call. iPECS Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to
the number of CO/IP line buttons.
OPERATION
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
5.4
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3 parties (iPECS-Lik)/13
Party (iPECS-MG), or 24 parties when using a Multi-Party Conference
Interface Module (MCIM). The other parties in the Conference may be
internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2 external parties in a
private conversation. This is an Unsupervised Conference, which is
not subject to the normal Hold Recall operation.
OPERATION
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Select the Conf Soft button,
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Select the Conf Soft button,
 Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Select the Conf Soft button.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Select the Conf Soft button.
28
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9 Conference Rooms
can be set up letting up to 24 parties converse when using a
MCIM(iPECS-Lik) and up to 12 parties(iPECS-MG). When setting up a
Conference Room, a password can be designated for invited parties
(internal and external parties) to use for accessing the established
Conference Room.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room password.
29
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
5.5
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special holding location
(Park Orbit), which can be accessed easily from any station in the
system. Typically, this feature is used with Paging to notify the desired
user of a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call Park timer.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS-100 or 601-619 for iPECS300 & 600),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit.
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541)
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (541).
 Dial the Park number(00-49).
30
LIP-7024LD
5.6
User Guide
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your Voice Mail Box.
OPERATION
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu and select the
Record Soft button, record warning tone is heard and recording
starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select the
Record Soft button or,
 Hang-up, return to idle.
31
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
6. Get Your Messages & Send SMS
The iPECS Phone allows you to send and receive several types of
messages. These are accessed via the Message Summary Display,
and described in the following paragraphs:
In iPECS-Lik
1: ST—Station Message Wait
2: CL—CLI Message Wait
3: VS—VSF Message Wait
4: VM—Commercial Voice Mail
5: FS—Feature server
6: MS—SMS message wait
In iPECS-MG
1: MWI—Message Wait Indication,
2: VMS—VMIB Message.
3: SMS—SMS Message.
6.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting indication when
you do not answer or your phone is in DND. A flashing MSG LED on
the iPECS Phone indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification,
a Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may review
and delete messages as well as respond with a call back.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To review your Station messages:
 Press the CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message Summary
display,
STA CLI VSF VMS UMS
SMS
001 001 005
006
001
004
 Dial 1 to view Station messages,
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press the CALL BACK button.
To delete the Station Message Wait:
 Dial ‘*’, and press 1.
32
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To delete all Station Message Waits:
 Dial ‘#’, and press 1.
In iPECS-MG
To review your Station messages:
 Press CALL BACK , the LCD shows the Message Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00)
SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)
 Dial 1 to view the Station messages,
 Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button to scroll through the messages.
To return a call from the current message:
 Press SAVE button to return the call from the current message.
6.2
Responding to a CLI Message indication
When external calls to your phone are not answered and Caller
Identification is provided from the network, a Calling Line Id. (CLI)
message is logged. You may review, delete or return these messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press the flashing CLI MESSAGE button, the first CLI message
information is displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CLI message wait information.
To review CLI Messages using the Summary Display:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
STA CLI VSF VMS UMS
SMS
001 001 005
006
001
004
 Dial 2, the first CLI message information is displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through CLI message wait information.
To delete the current CLI Message:
 Dial ‘*’ button, the next CLI message is displayed.
To delete all CLI Messages:
 Press SPEED ,
 Press * twice.
To respond to the current CLI message with a call:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
33
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To review CLI Messages using a Flex button:
 Press the CALL LOG button, the Call Log message information is
displayed,
 Press ▼ VOLUME ▲ to scroll through Log message wait information.(M
means the missed call and  means the answered call).
01 M 101
02  100
To return the current CLI message:
Press HOLD/SAVE .
6.3
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail Box, they can
leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail Box is part of the integrated
VMIM/VSF(iPECS-Lik)/VMIB(iPECS-MG) module, the iPECS Feature
Server or an external Voice Mail system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and management of the
received voice messages. While in your Mail Box, you have control of
your password and Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely
control Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF. You will need
to register an Authorization Code for your station to access the
VMIM/VSF Voice messages.
OPERATION
In iPECS-LIK
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
 Press the VOICE MAIL Flex button,
 Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
STA CLI VSF VMS UMS
SMS
001 001 005
006
001
004
 Dial 3 for VMIM/VSF, 4 for external VM or 5 for Feature Server
Voice Mail,
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
34
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered by the
VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 At answer, dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
In iPECS-MG
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:
 Press the VM access button or dial 523(VMIB access code),
 Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password to receive
the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the CALL BACK button:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the display,
MWI (01) VMS (00)
SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)
 Dial 2 for VMIM
 After the prompt enter your station number and password, to receive
the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompts sequentially,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for answer
by the VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer, dial 523(VMIB Access code) to receive ‘Mail Box &
Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the
‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes, then hang-up
6.4
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (max. 100 alphanumeric
characters) with other iPECS display Phone users. These messages
will activate the CALL BACK button LED and are displayed on the iPECS
Phone LCD.
35
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display Phone:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 36 (SMS send code),
 Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a new or edit an
existing message,
 Enter the station range to receive the message, to send to a single
station enter the station number twice,
 Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each character,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
STA CLI VSF VMS UMS
SMS
001 001 005
006
001
004
 Dial 6, the first two SMS messages are shown in brief,
 Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
To delete received Short text messages:
 Press the # key,
 Dial 1 to delete the message, 2 to cancel or 3 to delete all received
Short text messages.
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display phone user:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 43 (SMS send code),
 Dial the station number to receive the message
 Press HOLD/SAVE.
 Enter your message using 2 key strokes for each character, see
section 4.3.4,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:
 Press the flashing CALL BACK button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display,
MWI (01) VMS (00) SMS(00)
ENTER(MWI:1,VMS:2,SMS :3)


Dial 3 (retrieve SMS), the first two SMS messages display in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS message.
36
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
7. Using the Display Menu
In iPECS-Lik,
With the Display Menu, you can access the LIP-7024LD PhoneBook and
Schedule as well as other phone features through simple menu trees.
The Display Menu is activated using the Menu Navigation button.
Items from a menu may be selected by dialing the associated digit
or using the Navigation and OK buttons to select an item. The main
Display Menu selections are show in the LIP-7024LD as below.
In iPECS-MG,
With the Display Menu, you can access the LIP-7024LD PhoneBook as
well as other phone features through simple menu trees. The Display
Menu is activated using the Menu Navigation button.
Items from a menu may be selected by dialing the associated digit or
using the Navigation and OK buttons to select an item. The main
Display Menu selections are show in the LIP-7024LD as below.
-. User Organizer
-. Ring/BGM
-. COS/Password
-. Multi Message
-. Mobile Ext/Conference Room
-. Headset/Bluetooth
-. Station ICLID
-. Keyset Information
-. System Information
-. Attendant Program
37
LIP-7024LD
7.1
User Guide
Ez Menu(iPECS-Lik)
You may access Speed Dial, including Dial-By-Name, Outgoing (Dialed)
and Incoming Received Call Logs (10 calls each), Call Forward and
other features without complex dial codes by selecting ‘Ez-Menu’. From
the Ez-Menu and sub-menus, select an item dialing the associated digit
or use the Navigation and OK button to select an item. Also, Soft
buttons, such as Exit, Sel, and Back, may be available.
7.2
Phone Book(iPECS-Lik)
Under the Phone Book Menu, you may search, add, edit, and delete
contacts. Use the associated dial pad digits or Navigation and OK
buttons to access the Phone Book sub-menus. Where required,
characters may be entered with the ABC soft button.
38
LIP-7024LD
7.3
User Guide
Schedule(iPECS-Lik)
The LIP-7024LD will notify you of a schedule activation with a flashing
icon and alarm ring. You may record, edit or delete scheduled events
such as conferences and search scheduled records from the Schedule
sub-menus. Use the associated digit or the Navigation and OK buttons
to select an item from the sub-menus.
7.4
Customize(iPECS-Lik)
You may customize certain characteristics of the LIP-7024LD. The
display language can be selected from the available languages
supported, a user name can be entered, one of eight ring signals can be
defined, and headset operation can be defined.
Use the associated digit or th Navigation and OK buttons to select submenu items and enter values for the custom settings.
39
LIP-7024LD
7.5
User Guide
Setting(iPECS-Lik)
You may define certain settings of your LIP-7024LD. With the Enblock
setting enabled, all digits you dial to place a call are sent as a block of
digits after you select the SEND Soft button. The Station COS setting
permits you to activate Temporary and Walking Class of Service to
establish dialing privileges of the phone. In addition, the station
password and Intercom Answer mode (Handsfree, Privacy or Tone ring)
can be set.
Use the associated digit or the Navigation and OK
buttons to select sub-menu items and enter values for the desired
Setting.
7.6
Voice Mail(iPECS-Lik)
You may access a list of messages left in your internal or external voice
mail or in your unified message server if installed. You may then select
a message from the list. Use the associated digit or the Navigation
and OK buttons to select an item from the list.
40
LIP-7024LD
7.7
User Guide
User Organizer (iPECS-MG)
You may access Answer Mode(H/T/P), Station Name, Wake Up,
Language, LCD Date/Time, Back Light Setting by selecting ‘User
Organizer’. From the User Organizer Menu and sub-menus, select an
item dialing the associated digit or use the Navigation and OK button to
select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back, may be
available.
7.8
Phone Book (iPECS-MG)
Under the Phone Book Menu, you may search, add, edit, and delete
contacts. Use the associated dial pad digits or Navigation and OK
buttons to access the Phone Book sub-menus. Where required,
characters may be entered with the ABC soft button.
7.9
Ring/BGM (iPECS-MG)
You may access ICM/CO Ring Type, Ring Download and BGM(H/T/P),
by selecting ‘Ring/BGM’ menu. From the Ring/BGM Menu and submenus, select an item dialing the associated digit or use the Navigation
and OK button to select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK,
and Back, may be available.
7.10 COS/Password (iPECS-MG)
You may access Temporary COS, Restore COS, Walking COS, Register
Password, Call Log/SMS Protect by selecting ‘COS/Password’ menu.
From the COS/Password Menu and sub-menus, select an item dialing
the associated digit or use the Navigation and OK button to select an
item. Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back, may be available.
7.11 Multi Message (iPECS-MG)
You may access Preselected Message and SMS by selecting ‘Multi
Message’ menu. From the Multi Message Menu and sub-menus, select
an item dialing the associated digit or use the Navigation and OK button
to select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back, may
be available.
41
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
7.12 Mobile Ext/Conference Room (iPECS-MG)
You may access Mobile Extension and Conference room menu by
selecting ‘Mobile Ext/Conference room’ menu.
From the Mobile
Ext/Conference room Menu and sub-menus, select an item dialing the
associated digit or use the Navigation and OK button to select an item.
Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back, may be available.
7.13 Speaker/Headset (iPECS-MG)
You may access Speaker/Headset/Bluetooth/Headset Ring menu by
selecting ‘Spearker/Headset’ menu. From the Speaker/Headset Menu
and sub-menus, select an item dialing the associated digit or use the
Navigation and OK button to select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such as
Exit, OK, and Back, may be available.
7.14 Station ICLID (iPECS-MG)
You may access Station ICLID Register and View menu by selecting
‘Station ICLID’ menu. From the Station ICLID Menu and sub-menus,
select an item dialing the associated digit or use the Navigation and OK
button to select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back,
may be available.
7.15 Keyset Information (iPECS-MG)
You may access Station IP Address, MAC address and Keyset version
menu by selecting ‘Keyset Information’ menu.
From the Keyset
Information Menu and sub-menus, select an item dialing the associated
digit or use the Navigation and OK button to select an item. Also, Soft
buttons, such as Exit, OK, and Back, may be available.
7.16 System Information (iPECS-MG)
You may access System version and System IP Address menu by
selecting ‘System Information’ menu. From the System Information
Menu and sub-menus, select an item dialing the associated digit or use
the Navigation and OK button to select an item. Also, Soft buttons, such
as Exit, OK, and Back, may be available.
42
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
8. Remote System Access
8.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote users to gain access
to the system’s resources. The system will recognize remote user dialed
inputs (call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review voice
mails, etc). Remote users may be required to enter an Authorization
Code.
OPERATION
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Await answer and dial your authorization code (station number and
password),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
8.2
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and receive iPECS
calls on a registered mobile phone. You may need to activate the
Mobile Phone Extension feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is only effective with an ISDN CO line.
OPERATION
In iPECS-Lik
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37,
 Dial the mobile phone number,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 38,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
43
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,
NOTE—The mobile may reconnect to the transfer by pressing the #
key.

In iPECS-MG
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 51.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52.
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2.
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check the
Caller Id, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the mobile
phone returns to idle,

NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer by
pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
44
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
9. Miscellaneous Features
9.1
Background Music and Music on Hold
Two audio sources can be connected to the system. These sources or
an internal source provide input for Background Music (BGM) and Music
On Hold (MOH). In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can
be used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS Phone when
the station is idle. MOH is played to callers placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
NOTE—BGM is not supported in iPECS-MG.
OPERATION
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
9.2
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other stations and/or
external speakers. Stations are assigned to one or more of the Internal
Page Zones. The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
Page Zone codes in iPECS-Lik are:
1: Internal Page Zones
iPECS 100: 501-510
iPECS 300 & 600: 501-535
2: Internal All Call Page
543
3: External Page Zones
545-546
4: External All Call Page
548
5: All Call Page
549
Page Zone codes in iPECS-MG are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15 ) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page
543 + 00
External Page Zone
548
All Call Page
549
45
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to be recalled when
their turn comes in the queue. Users can also request a paged party
answer the Page using Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party
may answer the page from any phone in the system by dialing the MeetMe code.
OPERATION
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received:
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial 544 (iPECS-Lik)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page code).
9.3
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. Users separately login or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned.
Once logged in, place or receive one-way page announcements to/from
other users who are logged in to the same PTT group.
OPERATION
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial # 0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG),
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial # 0 (iPECS-Lik)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
 After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
46
LIP-7024LD
9.4
User Guide
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the system. The
alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset, BGM will be
provided.
OPERATION
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 41(iPECS-Lik)/13(iPECS-MG),
 Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
 For a daily (repeating alarm), dial #,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Station User Program code 42 (iPECS-Lik)/14(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.5
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a unique Alarm
Ring signal and LCD display may be received. To restart the monitor
circuit, the external contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring
signal terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst) may be received
each time the external contact is activated. A system contact also can
be assigned to act as a Door Open contact.
OPERATION
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565.
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS -300 & 600.
—Contacts 1 is available in the iPECS -MG.
47
LIP-7024LD
9.6
User Guide
Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation may be provided
with back-up batteries or Power Fail Transfer (PFT). When battery
back-up is provided the station will operate normally. When PFT is
implemented, an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service while power is
out.
9.7
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several Voice Memos to
provide Station Users with general information such as station number,
date, time, and feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
OPERATION
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (661 for iPECS-100 or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675-1 for iPECS-MG), date and time memo is
heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo feature code (662 for iPECS-100 or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675-2 for iPECS-MG), the station number memo
is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
48
LIP-7024LD

9.8
User Guide
Dial Voice Memo feature code (663 for iPECS-100 or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 675-3 for iPECS-MG), Station Status Memo is
heard.
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot Desk operation.
These Hot Desk phones let you log-on and use the Hot Desk phone as if
it were your station. Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on
the attributes assigned to your station number and you can make calls as
normal. When logged-out, calls to your station number are forward to
the destination you chose.
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial “* 0”(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Dial your Authorization Code (station number and Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial * twice(iPECS-Lik)/”525”(iPECS-MG),
 Use the ▼ VOLUME ▲ to select a call forward destination for your calls,
speed dial, joined mobile phone, VMIM/VSF, or VM group,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
49
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
10. Working with PBX, Centrex & ISDN features
10.1 Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host PBX system or
Centrex services from your service provider. The iPECS connects to
such a host with analog CO lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an extension of the host,
allowing access to the host system features using the host dial codes.
While on a call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to other
host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to regain dial tone
from the CO line without relinquishing control of the CO line to place
another call.
OPERATION
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select the
Flash soft button,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
10.2 Access the ISDN Network
10.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services requires that dialed
digits be sent to the ISDN as data and not tones. In this case, dialed
digits are sent as ‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the Flex Button
program procedures. Once active, dial into the ISDN for services;
however, actions other than dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility
operation.
OPERATION
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
50
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
10.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar to those of
Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary services are provided on a
subscription basis and, as with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash
button on an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be placed on Hold and a
second call placed on the line. You may then alternate between the two
held calls (Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line conference
can be established using the FLASH and CONF buttons. The conference
can also be placed on hold.
OPERATION
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary services:
 Press FLASH ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , CONF , or CO line button to activate the desired
feature.
10.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of Caller ID to the farend. This may be a subscription service of your carrier. Separate Flex
buttons are required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL), and
incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
OPERATION
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR / COLR button and place the call.
51
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
11. Setting Features & Flex buttons
11.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users to assign certain
attributes such as Authorization Codes (Passwords). After entering the
User Program mode, you dial the codes to select the attribute and setting.
Once selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User Program codes,
the feature/function and any input required are given in Appendix B. In
some cases, you enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
OPERATION
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
11.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex buttons on your
iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex
buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features providing One-Touch
feature activation (e.g., a Flex button may be assigned to access the
Account Code feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—enter station number,
Speed Dial—enter Station/System Speed dial bin number,
Flex Numbering Plan—enter Flex Numbering Plan code (refer to
Appendix A),
User Program Code—press TRANS/PGM and enter a User Program code
(refer to Appendix B)
CO/IP Line—enter the CO/IP line or group number.
OPERATION
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program codes
Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
52
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
12. Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-Lik
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
Intercom Call
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
10001599
501-535
550
550
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
556
556
556
557
557
557
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
Answering Machine Emulation
562
564
565
566
567
562
564
565
566
567
562
564
565
566
567
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Speed Dial Programming
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
53
iPECS600
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
Account Code with bin
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
601610
620659
66
601619
620667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Parking Locations
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
iPECS600
*66
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held
CO/IP
8*
8#xx
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
9
9
9
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line Access
54
SLT use
only
620-667
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
Direct Call Pickup
Remark
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
number
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Extension code
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
PTT Group Login/Logout
#0
#0
#0
Remark
& 600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Name
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Station Group
Remark
Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
Internal Page Answer
547
55
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group #
LIP-7024LD
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
Remark
(Meet-Me Page)
16
External Page
548
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
56
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
001 ~ 200: MG-300
01 ~ 80 : MG-100
LIP-7024LD
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
57
Remark
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf. Room
#
528 + Conf. Room
#
529 + HH:MM
LIP-7024LD
No
User Guide
Feature Name
Code
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
58
Remark
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
13. Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-Lik
Code Function
10
11 x
12 x
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute
Setting ( X = 1-2 )
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Remarks
Knock Down Station COS
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
Station Message Wait
Retrieve
32
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
SLT
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay (09)
Select download Ring Tone
0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Yes
Input time, 24 hour clock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
61 x
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
LCD Display Mode
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
59
Yes
LIP-7024LD
User Guide
Code Function
72
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
70
7*
Background Music
Station User Name
Registration
Input up to 7 characters
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
Display Soft Message
Display Serial number/Package
for SMEMU
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
*0
**
Remarks
SLT
Version Display
Requires VSF/External SMDI
VM
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
60
Yes
LIP-7024LD
In iPECS-MG
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
Set Pre-defined Message.
43
Send SMS Message
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
Create a Station User Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
61
LIP-7024LD
User
PGM Code
User Guide
Description
Remark
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
62
LIP-8004D
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
Date
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or
disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright
Laws. LG-Ericsson reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without
notice. The information furnished by LG-Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and
reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. LG-Ericsson and iPECS are trademarks of
LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only LG-Ericsson approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service
personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the
phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something
during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center
immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not
touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or
equipment damage.
6. Do not use the phone during a
thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result
in fire, severe electrical or acoustic
shock.
7. Do not use the power adapter if the
power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric
shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on
phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic
device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of
such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area
that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is
well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into
one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire
or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage
electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away
from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do
not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause
electric shock or damage the equipment
and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth
only. Do not use volatile liquids such as
petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may
cause a fire or result in discoloration or
damage to plastics. Do not clean with
wax or silicon products as these may
enter the equipment and cause operation
to become unstable.
LIP-8004D User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVISION HISTORY ................................................................................................................I
DISPOSAL OF YOUR OLD APPLIANCE ..........................................................................I
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION............................................................................. II
TABLE OF CONTENTS.................................................................................................I
1.INTRODUCTION................................................................................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................................1
FEATURE INFORMATION ...............................................................................................................................................1
FEATURE GROUPINGS ...................................................................................................................................................1
IPECS LIP-8004 PHONE DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................2
LIP-8004D PHONE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................... 3
1.5.1
Wiring Connectors............................................................................................ 4
1.5.2
Power ............................................................................................................... 4
1.5.3
Wall Mount ....................................................................................................... 4
2.RECEIVING CALLS............................................................................................................5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
ANSWERING A CALL WHILE IDLE .......................................................................................................................... 5
RESPONDING TO A CALL WHILE BUSY .............................................................................................................. 5
DIFFERENTIAL RING SIGNALS .................................................................................................................................. 6
ANSWERING CALLS AT NIGHT ...................................................................................................................................7
ANSWERING CALLS TO OTHER STATIONS .......................................................................................................7
USING DO-NOT-DISTURB (DND) TO BLOCK INCOMING CALLS ..................................................... 8
FORWARDING CALLS ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail ............................................... 8
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number .............................................................. 9
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message .............................................................. 11
3. PLACING CALLS ............................................................................................................14
3.1 INTERNAL CALLS ............................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station .................................................... 14
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait.................................................................................. 15
3.2 EXTERNAL CALLS ............................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls ......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line .......................................................... 17
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing ............................................ 17
i
LIP-8004D User Guide
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone ................................................................... 17
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ..................................... 18
3.3 USING AUTOMATED DIALING.................................................................................................................................... 18
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ..................................................................... 18
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ........................................................... 19
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers.................................................................. 19
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ............................................. 20
4. CALL HANDLING...........................................................................................................23
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CALL TRANSFER: SENDING A CALL TO A DIFFERENT DESTINATION ............................................23
CALL HOLD: PLACING A CALL IN A WAITING STATE .................................................................................23
BROKER CALL: SWITCHING BETWEEN TWO CALLS ................................................................................. 24
JOINING MULTIPLE PEOPLE IN A CONFERENCE .......................................................................................... 24
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room......................................................................... 25
4.5 CALL PARK: PLACING A CALL ON HOLD TO PAGE ....................................................................................26
5. RETRIEVING & RESPONDING TO MESAGES ............................................... 28
5.1 RESPONDING TO A STATION MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION .......................................................28
5.2 GETTING VOICE MAIL MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................28
6. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ....................................................................................29
6.1 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)..................................................................................................29
6.2 MOBILE PHONE EXTENSION ....................................................................................................................................29
7. MISC. FEATURES .........................................................................................................32
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
BACKGROUND MUSIC AND MUSIC ON HOLD ...............................................................................................32
USING INTERNAL, EXTERNAL AND MEET-ME PAGING .........................................................................32
PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) PAGE .................................................................................................................................33
WAKE-UP ALARM ............................................................................................................................................................ 34
ALARM/DOOR BELL........................................................................................................................................................ 34
POWER FAIL TRANSFER .............................................................................................................................................35
SYSTEM VOICE MEMO .................................................................................................................................................35
CONTRAST ............................................................................................................................................................................36
NETWORK CONFIG.........................................................................................................................................................36
8. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN.........................................................................................37
8.1 ACCESS PBX OR CENTREX .................................................................................................................................... 37
8.2 ACCESS THE ISDN NETWORK .............................................................................................................................. 37
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ........................................... 37
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction ................................................................. 38
9. SET FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ................................................................... 39
9.1 ENTERING STATION PROGRAM DATA ..............................................................................................................39
ii
LIP-8004D User Guide
9.2 ASSIGNING FEATURES TO FLEX BUTTONS ...................................................................................................39
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ....................................................... 40
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES .................................................................46
iii
LIP-8004D User Guide
1.1 General
1. Introduction
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2 Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone, and moves on
to receiving and placing calls, and then to more
advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator and/or iPECS Technical
Manuals as needed).
NOTE—Under certain operation conditions, this
equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency
calls (loss of power, etc.). Alternative arrangements
should be made for access to emergency services.
1.3 Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls,
Placing calls etc. Within each group, features are
arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1
LIP-8004D User Guide
1.4 iPECS LIP-8004 Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8004D Phone incorporates the latest in
VoIP technology and is intended for basic
communications (ex., a lobby or limited use phone). The
following image shows the LIP-8004D.
LIP-8004D Front and Back
Features are generally accessed using programmed
fixed, or flexible buttons, dial pad buttons, or dial codes
entered from the dial pad. In the remainder of this User
Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown with a
box surrounding the BUTTON designation. The following
image shows the phone and buttons are described.
iPECS LIP-8004D Diagram
2
LIP-8004D User Guide
1.4 iPECS LIP-8004 Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8004D Phone incorporates the latest in
VoIP technology and is intended for basic
communications (ex., a lobby or limited use phone). The
following image shows the LIP-8004D.
LIP-8004D Front and Back
Features are generally accessed using programmed
fixed, or flexible buttons, dial pad buttons, or dial codes
entered from the dial pad. In the remainder of this User
Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown with a
box surrounding the BUTTON designation. The following
image shows the phone and buttons are described.
iPECS LIP-8004D Diagram
2
LIP-8004D User Guide
DND – Blocks all incoming calls; red LED illuminates.
Speed – Access speed dialing, speed programming,
save number redial and last number redial.
Vol   – Adjusts volume for ringing, headset, and
speakerphone; adjusts LCD brightness (in idle state).
Trans/PGM –Call transfer, or programming mode.
Hold/Save – Places active call on hold or saves
programming information.
Call Back – Initiates call back request when calling a
busy station; call connects when busy station is idle.
On-hook Dial – Allows User to place a call while onhook. Toggle to activate; red LED illuminates.
Flexible – Some are system pre-programmed for line
appearance, and some are user programmable.
Ring/MSG Indicator – Illuminates when ringing, or
message waiting.
LCD Display – Displays station number/current time or
telephone number of destination while talking.
1.5 LIP-8004D Phone Installation
LIP Phones and Consoles can be connected to any
standard 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in
graphic). When connected to an 802.3af compliant
switch port (ex., POE8), LIP Phones and series
consoles obtain power from the Ethernet port. When
LAN power is not available, the AC/DC adaptor must be
used. The following image shows how to connect the
handset, power cord, and LAN cable to the phone.
iPECS LIP-8004D Connections
3
LIP-8004D User Guide
1.5.1 Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8004D has a single Ethernet port that is
connected to the LAN using a RJ-45 plug terminated
category 5 cable supplied with the Phone. A 2 meter (6
foot) cable is provided for desk mount installation.
Using the cable, one RJ-45 plug is inserted into the
"LAN" jack in the bottom of the Phone. The other RJ-45
plug is inserted into the RJ-45 jack previously wired to
an Ethernet switch port accessible by the MFIM. To
power the LIP Phone over the LAN, the switch port must
support POE (Power over Ethernet) standard 802.3af.
1.5.2 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
1.5.3 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions detail how to perform
a wall mount installation:




Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and tighten
the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch) of the screw
exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure the
phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and tighten
or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
4
LIP-8004D User Guide
Receiving Calls
2.1 Answering a Call While Idle
2. Receiving Calls
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered
by lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line button or a LOOP button. External calls are
from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed to
ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may
be assigned allowing others to answer the call before
the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc., will Recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in HandsFree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 Lift the handset to respond.
2.2 Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
5
LIP-8004D User Guide
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. When used audio is received from both the
active call and the Voice Over announcement.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals by: placing
the existing call on Hold and responding to the new
incoming call, activating One-time DND, sending a
Silent Text Message, or ignoring the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
 Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
2.3 Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The LIP-8004D has 8
ring tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. The tones are stored in the phone
permanent memory.
In iPECS-LIK
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Lift Handset
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
6
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
 Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
2.4 Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
2.5 Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
7
LIP-8004D User Guide
2.6 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb (DND) when you wish to not be
interrupted by pressing the DND button; the phone will
block incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast
busy tone and the display will show the DND status.
Activate Do-Not-Disturb while ringing (One-Time DND);
Ringing terminates and the caller will receive a fast busy
tone and it requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 Press the DND button.
2.7 Forwarding Calls
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls,
when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
8
LIP-8004D User Guide
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or
internal system resource:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the programmed FWD or dial 554 (Call Forward code),
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can
be forwarded from an internal station or a remote
location. You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1:
2:
Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded internally or externally.
Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
9
LIP-8004D User Guide
3:
4:
No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the programmed FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code
554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
10
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
 Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
 Dial Telephone number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
 Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
 Dial Telephone number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to callers. When calling your
Station, Internal callers will automatically receive the
selected message or you can send a text message you
select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you, see Station Speed Dial Character
entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-defined Text Messages;
some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown
in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
Message 03:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
11
LIP-8004D User Guide
Message 04:
Message 05:
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Lift the handset,
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the flashing programmed
 Press the # key.
12
FWD
button or dial 554,
LIP-8004D User Guide
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart,
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart

Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
message saved.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Press FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
13
LIP-8004D User Guide
3. Placing Calls
2. Placing Calls
3.1 Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, speak
to the called party.
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
14
LIP-8004D User Guide
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing just the last digit of the Intercom
number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 While placing a call to a busy station, dial * and wait for an
answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 While placing a call to a busy station, press the
button and hang-up.
CALL BACK
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, and after the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication with LED or ICON.
To activate Message Waiting:
 Press the CALL BACK .
3.2 External Calls
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-100, 001-200 for
iPECS-300 & 600).
15
LIP-8004D User Guide
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access
801-820 for iPECS-100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing for banking
services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
16
LIP-8004D User Guide
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line,
 Press the CALL BACK ,
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
becomes available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. When an
Account Code is entered, it is output from the system
to a printer in the SMDR report. An Account Code Flex
button can be programmed (refer to Assigning features
to Flex buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 550,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the Station’s Authorization code.
17
LIP-8004D User Guide
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
 Place call as normal.
3.3 Using Automated Dialing
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer.
In iPECS-LIK
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial *,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
18
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press Speed Soft button,
 Dial *,
 or
 press the LOG Soft button,
 Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select from the
last 100 numbers dialed or received,
 Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Saved Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED .
 Dial #
To store a number in the Saved Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press SPEED twice.
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800
System Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The
iPECS-300 & 600 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
19
LIP-8004D User Guide
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for
iPECS-100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 or 600).
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated
memory for 20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 0019) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 each
support 100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins (000099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50
Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-049). These
numbers are entered at the user’s station and may
include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special
instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1
digit—Send digits as ISDN
Keypad Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as in the
chart shown.
20
LIP-8004D User Guide
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
W - 91
P - 71
T - 81
X - 92
R - 72
U - 82
Y - 93
S - 73
V - 83
Z - 9#
Q - 7*
8 - 80
9 - 90
7 - 70
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and
Name(iPECS-LIK):
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name, if desired, using the Character
Entry chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex
button(iPECS-MG):
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial ‘1’ for Number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
21
LIP-8004D User Guide
3.3.4 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name (iPECSMG)
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the
Intercom directory, you must enter a name for your
station (up to 16 characters):
To place a call using Dial by Name:
 Press the SPEED button twice,
 Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2: Public
directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will display the names
in alphabetical order,
 Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys.
 Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 12 (Station User Name code),
 Enter the Name, up to 16 characters,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
22
LIP-8004D User Guide
4. Call Handling
3. Call Handling
4.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, using Call Transfer. You can
screen the transfer with the receiving party (Screened
Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are placed in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be used to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call the transfer party,
 Unscreened Call Transfer - Hang-up,
OR
 Screened Call Transfer - When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call and then hang-up.
4.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
23
LIP-8004D User Guide
4.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
4.4 Joining multiple people in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 24 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF Flex button is required.
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Press the CONF Flex button,
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Press the CONF Flex button,
 Press the CONF Flex button again to establish the conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
24
LIP-8004D User Guide
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Press the CONF Flex button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Press the CONF Flex button,
 Hand-up handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CONF Flex button
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
25
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
4.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired User of
Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601-619
for iPECS-300 & 600),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601 for
iPECS-300 & 600).
26
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit (541),
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit (541),
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
27
LIP-8004D User Guide
5. Retrieving &
Responding to
Messages
4. Retrieving & Responding to Mesages
5.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication when you do not answer or your phone is in
DND. A flashing MSG LED on the iPECS Phone
indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You
may respond with a call back.
To respond to your Station messages:
 Dial 557 to return message.
5.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
Box is part of the integrated Voice Mail module, the
iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and
management of the received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
 Dial 557(iPECS-LIK)/523(iPECS-MG), or
 Press CALL BACK, and Dial 2(iPECS-MG),
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for
answer by the Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer, dial #(iPECS-LIK)/523(iPECS-MG) to receive the
‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
28
LIP-8004D User Guide
6. Remote System
Access
5. Remote System Access
6.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc).
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Await an answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
 Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
6.2 Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive calls on a registered mobile phone. Calls to
your iPECS Phone will ring your Mobile Phone and you
can place calls using the resources of the iPECS. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature can be activated through an ISDN CO line.
29
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37.
 Dial the mobile phone number.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 38.
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check
the Caller ID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom
dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer by pressing the # key.
30
LIP-8004D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 51,
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52,
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
31
LIP-8004D User Guide
7. Misc. Features
6. Misc. Features
7.1 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
7.2 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS 100), 501535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
Internal All Call Page 543
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
32
LIP-8004D User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK):
 Press the CALL BACK ,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page code).
7.3 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Press the * key.
To place a page to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT Flex button.
 After confirmation tone make page announcement.
33
LIP-8004D User Guide
7.4 Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm Clock for each station. You
can set the alarm clock to repeat daily or as a one-time
alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/13(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock code).
 Dial hh/mm for time alarm should alert,
 Press # to have the alarm repeat daily,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/14(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock delete code)
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
7.5 Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial #* (Door Open code) and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS -300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
34
LIP-8004D User Guide
7.6 Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
7.7 System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos can be heard over the
speaker of the iPECS Phone and over the handset for
SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, or *661 for iPECS300 & 600, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
 Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, or *662 for iPECS-300 &
600, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
 The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, or *663 for iPECS-300 &
600, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
 Station Status Memo is heard.
35
LIP-8004D User Guide
7.8 Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
The Phone LCD brightness can be adjusted to your
preference.
To change the Phone LCD Contrast:
 While the phone is idle, press the VOL ▲▼ buttons.
 VOL ▲ will increase darkness.
 VOL ▼ will decrease dark (brightness).
7.9 Network Config.
The user can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. Settings:
 Press TRANS/PGM button and dial ##1(iPECS-LIK)/80(iPECSMG),
 Enter the password (default=147*), the following will display:

MFIM #1 –
CHANGE[#]



Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
Press the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To set default Config settings:
 In Network Config. Menu, use the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to
locate the Default Config Screen (shown),
Set default – [*]
 Press the * key.
To exit Config. Settings:
 Press the On Hook Dial button,
 Press the * key to exit,
OR
 Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new settings.
36
LIP-8004D User Guide
8. PBX, Centrex &
ISDN
7. PBX, Centrex & ISDN
8.1 Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Momentarily press the Hook-switch,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
8.2 Access the ISDN Network
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial
into the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
37
LIP-8004D User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
 OR
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the receiving phone (may be a subscription
service of your carrier). Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR/COLR button and place the call.
38
LIP-8004D User Guide
8. Set Features & Flex Buttons
9. Set Features & Flex
9.1 Entering Station Program Data
Buttons
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B.
To assign User Programmable station attributes:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may
even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (e.g., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin
number.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code
(refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program
codes, first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
39
LIP-8004D User Guide
Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-LIK
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
40
Remark
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only;
Toggle
ON/OFF
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
LIP-8004D User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o
answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620 –
659
66
601619
620 –
667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Remark
only
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line Access
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
41
SLT use
only
620 –
667
*66
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) = CO
Line
LIP-8004D User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door)
Door Open (2nd Door)
Door Open (3rd Door)
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door)
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
##
*0
##
*0
##
#0
#0
#0
Remark
number
iPECS-300
& 600
iPECS-300
& 600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
Name
1
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
42
Remark
LIP-8004D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For
Attendant
Page Auto Answer
545
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
14
15
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call
Page
Xx: Page
Group #
546
548
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
43
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
LIP-8004D User Guide
No
34
Feature Name
Code
Direct Call Pickup
Remark
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
44
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line
#
(001 ~ 200 :
MG-300
01 ~ 80 :
MG-100)
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8004D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
57
58
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
535
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
61
62
63
64
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
COLR Access
Pilot Hunt Call
Command Call Oneway
582
583
584
585
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Camp On Register
OHVO Register
Mobile Num Register
Mobile CLI Register
Mobile Access
CCR Access
CCR Access And Drop
System Hold
Return Held CO
Sys Memo
DISA Tone Service
All Feature Cancel
590
591
592
593
594
670
671
560
8**
675
678
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
System Alarm Reset
Fault Alarm Reset
Door Open
Keypad Facility
T-Net Log-In/Out
Universal Answer
USB Call Record
565
566
#*1
##*
586
587
588
87
88
89
90
Delete All VM Message
VM Page Message Record
Direct VM Transfer
Loop Key
681
682
683
684
91
Call Log
685
45
Remark
LIP-8004D User Guide
Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-LIK
Code
Function
10
Enblock Mode Dialing
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
21
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
(X = 1-2 )
Knock Down Station COS
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
31
32
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Moblie Extension CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Timer
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
(Message 00)
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
52 xx
Remarks
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+; On/Off, 2+: ring delay
(0~9)
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
53 xx
Create Conference Room
54 xx
Delete Conference Room
71
73
74 x
79
LCD Display Mode
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone Version
46
Station number +up to 12
digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00~20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
N/A
Input up to 12 characters
LIP-8004D User Guide
Code
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9* xx
Function
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
Assign ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
Assign PTT Button
{IN-ROOM INDICATION} Button
Assignment
Remarks
Requires Voice Mail
(xx : 01~10)
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
12 +
Name
13 +
Time
14
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
User name creation
2 digit for each character
Set wake-up alarm time
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
47
LIP-8004D User Guide
Code
Function
22
TRK Ring Type
Remarks
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 +
MSG
number
[xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom #
Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm
& Auth
Code
55 + Rm
& Auth
Code
61
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
48
www.lg-nortel.com
LIP-8008D
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
Date
Jan. 2009
Aug. 2010
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached
to a product, it means the product is covered by the
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or
disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright
Laws. LG- Ericsson reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without
notice. The information furnished by LG- Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and
reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. LG- Ericsson and iPECS are trademarks of
LG- Ericsson Co., Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only LG-Ericsson approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service
personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the
phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something
during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center
immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not
touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or
equipment damage.
6. Do not use the phone during a
thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result
in fire, severe electrical or acoustic
shock.
7. Do not use the power adapter if the
power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric
shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on
phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic
device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of
such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area
that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is
well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into
one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire
or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage
electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away
from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do
not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause
electric shock or damage the equipment
and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth
only. Do not use volatile liquids such as
petrol, alcohol, or acetone as this may
cause a fire or result in discoloration or
damage to plastics. Do not clean with
wax or silicon products as these may
enter the equipment and cause operation
to become unstable.
LIP-8008D User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REVISION HISTORY ................................................................................................................I
DISPOSAL OF YOUR OLD APPLIANCE ..........................................................................I
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION............................................................................. II
TABLE OF CONTENTS.................................................................................................I
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................................1
FEATURE INFORMATION ...............................................................................................................................................1
FEATURE GROUPINGS ...................................................................................................................................................1
IPECS LIP-8008 PHONE DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................2
LIP-8008D PHONE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................... 3
1.5.1
Wiring Connectors............................................................................................ 4
1.5.2
Power ............................................................................................................... 4
1.5.3
Wall Mount ....................................................................................................... 5
2. RECEIVING CALLS .........................................................................................................6
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
ANSWERING A CALL WHILE IDLE ......................................................................................................................... 6
RESPONDING TO A CALL WHILE BUSY ............................................................................................................ 6
DIFFERENTIAL RING SIGNALS .................................................................................................................................7
ANSWERING CALLS AT NIGHT................................................................................................................................ 9
ANSWERING CALLS TO OTHER STATIONS .................................................................................................... 9
USING DO-NOT-DISTURB (DND) TO BLOCK INCOMING CALLS................................................... 9
FORWARDING CALLS ................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.7.1
Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail .......................................... 10
2.7.2
Forwarding calls to an external number ......................................................... 11
2.7.3
Forwarding callers to a Text Message ........................................................... 13
3. PLACING CALLS ............................................................................................................17
3.1 INTERNAL CALLS ..............................................................................................................................................................17
3.1.1
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ................................................. 17
3.1.2
To leave a Message Wait............................................................................... 18
3.2 EXTERNAL CALLS ........................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2.1
Placing external CO/VoIP calls ...................................................................... 18
3.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line........................................................ 20
3.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing ......................................... 20
3.2.4
To disable dialing from your phone ................................................................ 21
i
LIP-8008D User Guide
3.2.5
To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone .................................. 21
3.3 USING AUTOMATED DIALING ................................................................................................................................. 21
3.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR)................................................................... 21
3.3.2
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ........................................................ 22
3.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers............................................................... 22
3.3.4
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers .......................................... 23
4. CALL HANDLING...........................................................................................................24
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CALL TRANSFER: SENDING A CALL TO A DIFFERENT DESTINATION.......................................... 24
CALL HOLD: PLACING A CALL IN A WAITING STATE ............................................................................... 24
BROKER CALL: SWITCHING BETWEEN TWO CALLS............................................................................... 25
JOINING MULTIPLE PEOPLE IN A CONFERENCE ....................................................................................... 25
4.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room...................................................................... 26
4.5 CALL PARK: PLACING A CALL ON HOLD TO PAGE.................................................................................. 27
5. RETRIEVING & RESPONDING TO MESAGES ................................................29
5.1 RESPONDING TO A STATION MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION .....................................................29
5.2 GETTING VOICE MAIL MESSAGES ....................................................................................................................29
6. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS ................................................................................... 30
6.1 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ...............................................................................................30
6.2 MOBILE PHONE EXTENSION..................................................................................................................................30
7. MISC. FEATURES ........................................................................................................ 33
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
BACKGROUND MUSIC AND MUSIC ON HOLD (IPECS-LIK) .........................................................33
USING INTERNAL, EXTERNAL AND MEET-ME PAGING ......................................................................33
PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) PAGE ...............................................................................................................................34
WAKE-UP ALARM ..........................................................................................................................................................35
ALARM/DOOR BELL .....................................................................................................................................................35
POWER FAIL TRANSFER...........................................................................................................................................36
SYSTEM VOICE MEMO...............................................................................................................................................36
CONTRAST (IPECS-LIK)........................................................................................................................................ 37
NETWORK CONFIG....................................................................................................................................................... 37
8. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN........................................................................................ 38
8.1 ACCESS PBX OR CENTREX ..................................................................................................................................38
8.2 ACCESS THE ISDN NETWORK ............................................................................................................................38
8.2.1
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features ........................................ 38
8.2.2
Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction .............................................................. 39
9. SET FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS ................................................................... 40
9.1 ENTERING STATION PROGRAM DATA ............................................................................................................40
9.2 ASSIGNING FEATURES TO FLEX BUTTONS.................................................................................................40
ii
LIP-8008D User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN .........................................................41
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES .................................................................47
iii
LIP-8008D User Guide
1. Introduction
1.1 General
1. Introduction
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2 Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone, and moves on
to receiving and placing calls, and then to more
advanced features. Each section includes a brief and
basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator and/or iPECS Technical
Manuals as needed).
NOTE—Under certain operation conditions, this
equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency
calls (loss of power, etc.). Alternative arrangements
should be made for access to emergency services.
1.3 Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving calls,
Placing calls etc. Within each group, features are
1
LIP-8008D User Guide
arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1.4 iPECS LIP-8008 Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8008D Phone incorporates the latest in
VoIP technology and is intended for basic
communications (ex., a lobby or limited use phone). The
following image shows the LIP-8008D.
LIP-8008D Front and Back
Features are generally accessed using programmed
fixed, or flexible buttons, dial pad buttons, or dial codes
entered from the dial pad. In the remainder of this User
Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown with a
box surrounding the BUTTON designation. The following
image shows the phone with button descriptions.
iPECS LIP-8008D Diagram
2
LIP-8008D User Guide
DND – Blocks all incoming calls; red LED illuminates.
Speed – Access speed dialing, speed programming.
Vol   – Adjusts volume for ringing, headset, and
speakerphone; adjusts LCD brightness (in idle state).
Trans/PGM –Call transfer, or programming mode.
Hold/Save – Places active call on hold or saves
programming information.
Call Back – Initiates call back request when calling a
busy station; call is completed when busy station returns
to idle status.
Speaker – Allows User to place a call while on-hook.
Toggle to activate; red LED illuminates.
Flexible – Some are system pre-programmed for line
appearance, and some are user programmable.
Ring/MSG Indicator – Illuminates when ringing, or
message waiting.
LCD Display – Phone interface for status, dialing
directories, and text message information.
Soft Buttons – Used with fixed and flexible features;
use changes in relation to LCD display
Hands-free Microphone – Used for hands-free
speakerphone function.
1.5 LIP-8008D Phone Installation
LIP Phones can be connected to any standard 10/100
Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in graphic). When
connected to an 802.3af compliant switch port (ex.,
POE8), LIP Phones obtain power from the Ethernet port.
When LAN power is available, do not use AC/DC
adaptor. When LAN power is not available, the AC/DC
adaptor must be used. The following image shows how
to connect the handset, power cord, and LAN cable to
the phone.
3
LIP-8008D User Guide
iPECS LIP-8008D Connections
1.5.1 Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8008D has a two Ethernet ports one is
connected to the LAN using a RJ-45 plug terminated
category 5 cable supplied with the Phone, the other can
be connected to a desktop PC. Using the cable, one
RJ-45 plug is inserted into the "LAN" jack in the bottom
of the Phone. The other RJ-45 plug is inserted into the
RJ-45 jack previously wired to an Ethernet switch port
accessible by the iPECS system. To power the LIP
Phone over the LAN, the switch port must support POE
(Power over Ethernet) standard 802.3af.
1.5.2 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
4
LIP-8008D User Guide
1.5.3 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions detail how to perform
a wall mount installation:





Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and tighten
each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch) of the screw
exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure the
phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and tighten
or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
For the wall-mounting, sleeve of the CAT5 cable should be
moved backward to prevent it protrude.
5
LIP-8008D User Guide
2. Receiving Calls
2.1 Answering a Call While Idle
2. Receiving Calls
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external calls, Intercom Voice Announce calls,
and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered
by lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line button or a LOOP button. External calls are
from CO lines or VoIP channels that are programmed to
ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay Ring may
be assigned allowing others to answer the call before
the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc., will Recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in HandsFree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset and, then press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 Lift the handset to respond.
2.2 Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tone on top
6
LIP-8008D User Guide
of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. When used audio is received from both the
active call and the Voice Over announcement.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals by: placing
the existing call on Hold and responding to the new
incoming call, activating One-time DND, sending a
Silent Text Message, or ignoring the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
 Press the flashing FLEX button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
2.3 Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
th
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5 to
th
8 Ring Tone
7
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
 Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
 Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
 Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
 Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
 Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
8
LIP-8008D User Guide
2.4 Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
2.5 Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; call is
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
2.6 Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb (DND) when you wish not to be
interrupted by pressing the DND button; the phone will
block incoming calls. Internal callers will receive a fast
busy tone and the display will show the DND status.
Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy (One-Time DND);
DND will be active only for the duration of the present
call, and requires a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
9
LIP-8008D User Guide
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 While on an active call, press the DND button; the DND LED
will illuminate,
 When the station returns to idle, DND will cancel and the LED
will extinguish.
2.7 Forwarding Calls
2.7.1 Forwarding calls to another station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls,
when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
10
LIP-8008D User Guide
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another phone or
internal system resource:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button ,
 Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button ,
 Press the # key.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different phone (Call
Forward, Remote):
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button ,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button,
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Press the # key.
2.7.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external CO/IP destination; calls can
be forwarded from an internal station or a remote
location. You may define the conditions or ‘type of
forward’ as below:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Unconditional—All calls to the station, except
recalls, are forwarded internally or externally.
Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when station is busy.
No Answer—Forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not answer
within the No Answer timer.
Busy/No Answer—Forwards calls if the station is
busy or does not answer within the No Answer
timer.
11
LIP-8008D User Guide
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In IPECS-LIK
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button,
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD soft button,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code
554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
12
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from your phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 554 (Call Forward Register Feature Code),
 Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
 Dial Telephone number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 554 (Call Forward Register Feature Code),
 Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
 Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
 Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
 Dial Telephone number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
2.7.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to callers. When calling your
Station, Internal callers will automatically receive the
selected message or you can send a text message you
select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you, see Station Speed Dial Character
entry chart.
In addition, there are ten fixed Pre-defined Text
Messages; some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc.
(as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
Message 03:
Message 04:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
13
LIP-8008D User Guide
Message 05:
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
14
LIP-8008D User Guide
To activate Custom or Pre-defined Message Forward:
 Lift the handset,
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial #.
 Press HOLD/SAVE
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart,
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
W - 91
P - 71
T - 81
X - 92
R - 72
U - 82
Y - 93
S - 73
V - 83
Z - 9#
Q - 7*
8 - 80
9 - 90
7 - 70
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart

Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
message saved.
15
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 41,
 Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Press FWD button or dial 554,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 42,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
@
A
:
B
/
C
3
D
E
4
G
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
J
M
P
T
W
.
*
#

Press
<
Num
4
@
a
:
b
/
c
F
d
e
f
3
H
I
g
h
i
4
K
N
Q
U
X
,
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
o
r
v
y
?
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
j
k
m
n
S
p
q
t
u
Z
w
x
!
.
,
*
#
Character Entry Chart
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
16
<
1
s
z
!
1
2
LIP-8008D User Guide
3. Placing Calls
3. Placing Calls
3.1 Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with a single
tuch of the button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, speak
to the called party.
3.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
17
LIP-8008D User Guide
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing just the last digit of the Intercom
number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 While placing a call to a busy station, dial * and wait for an
answer.
To Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 While placing a call to a busy station, press the
button and hang-up.
CALL BACK
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #, and after the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
3.1.2 To leave a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the MSG LED will
flash.
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Message Waiting:
 Lift handset, and press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 556 (a confirmation tone will be heard) and hang-up.
In iPECS-MG
To activate Message Waiting:
 Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
3.2 External Calls
3.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
18
LIP-8008D User Guide
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-100, 001-200 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 001-600 for iPECS-1200).
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or 001-240
for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access
801-820 for iPECS-100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600,
89001-89201 for iPECS-1200
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access
9
When dialing on a CO line, which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing for banking
services, etc.
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
19
LIP-8008D User Guide
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
3.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial a busy CO/IP line,
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
becomes available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
3.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. When an
Account Code is entered, it is output from the system
to a printer in the SMDR report. An Account Code Flex
button can be programmed (refer to Assigning features
to Flex buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 550,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
20
LIP-8008D User Guide
3.2.4 To disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable dialing outside calls
from the phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you
must enter the Station’s Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
3.2.5 To temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number and password),
 Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
 Place call as normal.
3.3 Using Automated Dialing
3.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer.
To dial the Last Number for an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial *.
21
LIP-8008D User Guide
3.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Saved Number Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED .
 Dial #
To store a number in the Saved Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press SPEED twice.
3.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800
System Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The
iPECS-300 & 600 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
The iPECS-1200 system each have memory allocated
for 12000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000031999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200-999 for
iPECS-100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 or 600 or 2000031999 for iPECS-1200, 2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 , or 20003999 for iPECS-MG300).
22
LIP-8008D User Guide
3.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated
memory for 20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 0019) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200
each support 100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins
000-099). The iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50
Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-049). These
numbers are entered at the user’s station and may
include several ‘special’ instructions.
Special
instructions and the corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
FLASH not as 1st digit—The system will generate a
flash on the CO line.
st
CALL BACK as 1
digit—Send digits as ISDN
Keypad Facility message.
st
‘*’ as 1 digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover,
the system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 Enter the associated name, if desired,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
23
LIP-8008D User Guide
4. Call Handling
4. Call Handling
4.1 Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, using Call Transfer. You can
screen the transfer with the receiving party (Screened
Call Transfer) or complete the transfer without
screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are placed in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be used to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call the transfer party,
 Unscreened Call Transfer - Hang-up,
OR
 Screened Call Transfer - When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call and then hang-up.
4.2 Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
24
LIP-8008D User Guide
4.3 Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls, Broker Call:
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
4.4 Joining multiple people in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 24 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
A CONF button is required.
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Press CONF .
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Press CONF .
 Repeat to add additional parties to the conference
 Press CONF .
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
25
LIP-8008D User Guide
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Press the CONF button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with two external parties,
 Press the CONF button.
 Hand-up handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CONF button
4.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (delete Conference Room code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
26
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
4.5 Call Park: Placing a call on hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired User of
Call Park.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601-619
for iPECS-300 & 600, 601-800 for iPECS-1200),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit code (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601 for
iPECS-300 & 600, 601-800 for iPECS-1200).
27
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit (541),
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit (541),
 Dial the Park number (00-49)
28
LIP-8008D User Guide
5. Retrieving &
Responding to
Messages
5. Retrieving & Responding to Mesages
5.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication when you do not answer or your phone is in
DND. A flashing CALL BACK LED on the iPECS Phone
indicates a Message Waiting. As a further notification, a
Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You
may respond with a call back.
To respond to your Station messages:
 Press CALL BACK to return message.
5.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
Box is part of the integrated Voice Mail module, the
iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and
management of the received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station to Voice Mail. You will
need to register an Authorization Code for your station
to access VMIM/VSF Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally:
 Press CALL BACK ,
 After the prompt enter your station number and password,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To access Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line assigned for
answer by the Auto Attendant,
 Upon answer,
dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt(iPECS-LIK)/
dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
29
LIP-8008D User Guide
6. Remote System
Access
6. Remote System Access
6.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc).
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Await an answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
 Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
6.2 Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive calls on a registered mobile phone. Calls to
your iPECS Phone will ring your Mobile Phone and you
can place calls using the resources of the iPECS. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is activated through an ISDN CO line.
30
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37.
 Dial the mobile phone number.
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button.
 Dial 38.
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station, the system will check
the Caller ID, answer the call and the user will receive intercom
dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS calls as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial * while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer by pressing the # key.
31
LIP-8008D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 51,
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 52,
 Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
 Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
32
LIP-8008D User Guide
7. Misc. Features
7. Misc. Features
7.1 Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
7.2 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones 501-510 (iPECS 100), 501535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
Internal All Call Page 543
External Page Zones 545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page 543 + 00
External Page Zones 548
All Call Page
549
33
LIP-8008D User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK):
 Press CALL BACK ,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page code).
7.3 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out code.
 Press the * key.
To place a page to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT button.
 After confirmation tone make page announcement.
34
LIP-8008D User Guide
7.4 Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm Clock for each station. You
can set the alarm clock to repeat daily or as a one-time
alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/13(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock code).
 Dial hh/mm for time alarm should alert,
 Press # to have the alarm repeat daily,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/14(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock delete code)
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
BGM will be provided.
7.5 Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial #* (Door Open code) and contact number 1 to 4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS -300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
35
LIP-8008D User Guide
7.6 Power Fail Transfer
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
7.7 System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos can be heard over the
speaker or handset of the iPECS Phone and over the
handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message
waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
NOTE—Only activated features are announced.
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, or *661 for iPECS300 & 600 & 1200, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
 Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, or *662 for iPECS-300
& 600 & 1200, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
 The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, or *663 for iPECS-300
& 600 & 1200, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
 Station Status Memo is heard.
36
LIP-8008D User Guide
7.8 Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
The Phone LCD brightness can be adjusted to your
preference.
To change the Phone LCD Contrast:
 While the phone is idle, press the VOL ▲▼ buttons.
 VOL ▲ will increase darkness.
 VOL ▼ will decrease dark (brightness).
7.9 Network Config.
The user can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. Settings:
 Press TRANS/PGM button and Dial 78(iPECS-LIK)/80(iPECSMG),
 Enter the password (default=147*), the following will display:
 MFIM #1 –
CHANGE[#]
 Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles (MFIM),
 Press the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To set default Config settings:
 In Network Config. Menu, use the VOL ▲ VOL ▼ buttons to
locate the Default Config Screen (shown),
Set default – [*]
 Press the * key.
To exit Config. Settings:
 Press SPEAKER ,
 Press the * key to exit,
OR
 Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new settings.
37
LIP-8008D User Guide
8. PBX, Centrex &
ISDN
8. PBX, Centrex & ISDN
8.1 Access PBX or Centrex
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Press the FLASH button
 After receiving new dial tone, dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
8.2 Access the ISDN Network
8.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial
into the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
38
LIP-8008D User Guide
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
8.2.2 Activating ISDN Caller ID restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the receiving phone (may be a subscription
service of your carrier). Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate incoming, Connected Line (COL),
and outgoing, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the CLIR/COLR button and place the call.
39
LIP-8008D User Guide
9. Set Features & Flex
Buttons
9. Set Features & Flex Buttons
9.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B.
To assign User Programmable station attributes:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
9.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone. If allowed, you may
even assign CO/IP lines to the Flex buttons.
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (e.g., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits, as a
one-touch account code button).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin
number.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code
(refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs. For User Program
codes, first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
40
LIP-8008D User Guide
Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
In iPECS-LIK
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
Intercom Call
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
10001599
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
10002199
301~40
0
543
544
545546
548
549
550
550
550
550
Flash Command to CO
Line
Last Number Redial
551
551
551
551
552
552
552
552
DND
553
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
556
556
556
556
557
557
557
557
558
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre
MSG
CO System Hold
559
559
559
559
560
560
560
560
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
41
Remark
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only;
Toggle
ON/OFF
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-8008D User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
Remark
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
561
SLT use
only
Attendant Unavailable
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off
Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue
Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
572
573
574
575
572
573
574
575
572
573
574
575
576
576
576
576
577
578
577
578
577
578
577
578
579
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620 –
659
66
601619
620 –
667
*66
601619
620 –
667
*66
601800
401500
*66
67
7
8xx
01-20
67
7
8xx
01-72
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xx
88xxx
88xxx
67
7
89xxx
001201
88xxx
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line
42
SLT use
only
LIP-8008D User Guide
Feature
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS
-600
iPECS
-1200
Access
01-42
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
001200
8*
8#xxx
001400
8*
8#xxx
001600
8*
8#xxx
9
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
##
#0
#0
#0
#0
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
Available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door)
Door Open (2nd Door)
Door Open (3rd Door)
Door Open (4th Door)
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conference
extend code
PTT Group Login/Logout
Remark
xx(x) =
CO Line
number
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Station Number
2
CO Group Access Code
3
Code
Name
Station Group Number
Remark
100 ~ 4xx
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
Attendant Call
0
2
Conference Room 1
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
43
Remark
LIP-8008D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
11
Internal Page
543
12
13
Personal VM Page
Announcement Page For
Attendant
Page Auto Answer
544
545
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
548
17
18
Internal-External Page All
Call Forward Register
549
554
19
514
21
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Register
Pilot Hunt Call Forward
Cancel
DND Status Change
516
22
23
24
25
26
DND Delete
Account Code
CO Flash
Last Number Redial
Station Speed PGM
517
550
551
552
553
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Speed Dial
MWI Register
MWI Answer
MWI Cancel
Call Back Register
Call Back Cancel
Group Call Pickup
555
557
558
559
518
519
564
14
15
20
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group
#
546
515
44
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
LIP-8008D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
34
35
36
Direct Call Pickup
Walking COS
Call Parking Location
7
520
541
37
38
PGM Mode Access
Two-Way Record
521
522
39
40
41
VMIB Access
AME Access
CO Line Access
523
524
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
48
49
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
Name Register
Create Conf Room
525
526
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Wake Up Register
Wake Up Cancel
Temporarily COS Down
Cancel Temp COS Down
Password Change
Inter-Phone Group Access
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
45
Remark
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 :
MG-300
01 ~ 80 :
MG-100)
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8008D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
59
60
61
Forced Handsfree Call
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
537
582
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
46
Remark
LIP-8008D User Guide
Appendix B User Program Codes
In iPECS-LIK
Code
10
11 x
12 x
Function
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
15 x
19
21
22
23
30
31
32
52 xx
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
Station Ring Download
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
Restore Station COS
Walking COS
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
Remarks
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring delay (0-9)
Select download Ring Tone 0-9
May require Authorization code
May require Authorization code
Station number +up to 12 digits,
no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) & optional
password
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3:
both
47
LIP-8008D User Guide
Code
74 x
75
76
77
79
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
91
94
95
96
97
98
Function
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Display Phone Version
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
CONF Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
{IN-ROOM INDICATION} Button
Assignment
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
9* xx
*0
**
*7
Remarks
Input up to 12 characters
Requires VSF/External SMDI VM
(xx : 01~10)
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
12 + Name
User name creation
13 + Time
Set wake-up alarm time
2 digit for each character
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
14
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
48
LIP-8008D User Guide
Code
Function
Remarks
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
LIP-Series Only
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 + MSG
number [xx]
SMS Message Protect
33
Auth. Code required
Set Pre-defined Message.
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom # Deactivation
43
Create a Station User
Message
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
Register the mobile CLI
number
X=1-2
42
53 + x
54 + Rm &
Auth Code
55 + Rm &
Auth Code
61
X=1-2
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
49
LIP-8012D &
8024D
User Guide
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Revision History
Issue
Date
Remark
1.0
1.1
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product, it means the product is covered
by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized
reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly
prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. LG-Ericsson reserves the right to
make changes in specifications at any time without notice. The information
furnished by LG-Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but
is not warranted to be true in all cases. LG-Ericsson and iPECS are trademarks of
LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only LG-Ericssonl approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service
personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the
phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something
during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center
immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not
touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or
equipment damage.
6. Do not use the phone during a
thunderstorm. Lightning strike may
result in fire, severe electrical or
acoustic shock.
7. Do not use the power adapter if the
power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric
shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on
phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic
device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of
such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area
that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is
well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into
one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire
or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the
phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will
damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away
from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do
not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause
electric shock or damage the equipment
and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry
cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids
such as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as
this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do
not clean with wax or silicon products as
these may enter the equipment and
cause operation to become unstable.
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................1
1.1
General............................................................................................. 1
1.2
Feature Information .............................................................................. 1
1.3
Feature Groupings ............................................................................... 1
1.4
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Description ............................................. 2
1.5
2.
LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Installation ....................................................... 3
1.5.1
Phone Connections .................................................................... 3
1.5.2
Wiring Connectors ...................................................................... 4
1.5.3
Power ..................................................................................... 4
1.5.4
Wall Mount............................................................................... 5
LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ............................................6
2.1
Using the Display Menu ......................................................................... 6
2.1.1
Phone Setting ........................................................................... 7
2.1.2
Conference Room ...................................................................... 8
2.1.3
ICM SMS................................................................................. 9
2.1.4
Network Config. ....................................................................... 10
2.1.5
Attendant menu ....................................................................... 11
2.2
Using the Speakerphone ...................................................................... 11
2.3
Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset (LIP-8024D only) .................................. 12
2.4
Using a Serial DSS............................................................................. 14
3. RECEIVING CALLS .....................................................................................16
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle................................................................... 16
3.2
Responding to a Call While Busy ............................................................ 17
3.3
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)............................................... 17
3.4
Differential Ring Signals ....................................................................... 18
3.5
Answering Calls at Night ...................................................................... 19
3.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations ........................................................... 20
3.7
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls .................................... 20
3.8
Forwarding Calls................................................................................ 20
3.8.1
Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail ............................... 20
3.8.2
Forwarding calls to an external number........................................... 22
3.8.3
Forwarding callers to a Text Message ............................................ 24
4. PLACING A CALL .......................................................................................28
4.1
Internal Calls .................................................................................... 28
4.1.1
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ..................................... 28
i
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
4.1.2
4.2
4.3
Leaving a Message Wait ............................................................ 29
External Calls ................................................................................... 29
4.2.1
Placing external CO/VoIP calls ..................................................... 29
4.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line.......................................... 31
4.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing .............................. 31
4.2.4
Disable dialing from your phone.................................................... 31
4.2.5
Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ............................ 32
Using Directory.................................................................................. 32
4.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR) .................................................. 32
4.3.2
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial .......................................... 33
4.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers ............................................... 34
4.3.4
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers ............................... 34
4.3.5
Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name ................................... 37
4.3.6
Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR) ................................ 38
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING .................................40
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ................................... 40
5.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state .................................................. 40
5.3
Broker Call: Switching between two calls................................................... 41
5.4
Joining Multiple People in a Conference.................................................... 41
5.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room..................................................... 43
5.5
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page................................................... 43
5.6
Two-Way Record: Recording a call.......................................................... 44
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES ...................................................................45
6.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication .................................... 45
6.2
Getting Voice Mail Messages................................................................. 45
6.3
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages ............................................. 47
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS .........................................................................50
7.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ....................................................... 50
7.2
Mobile Phone Extension....................................................................... 50
8. MISC. FEATURES.......................................................................................53
8.1
Call Log .......................................................................................... 53
8.2
Contrast .......................................................................................... 54
8.3
Background Music and Music on Hold ...................................................... 55
8.4
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ............................................. 55
8.5
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page..................................................................... 56
8.6
Wake-Up Alarm ................................................................................. 57
8.7
Alarm/Door Bell ................................................................................. 57
8.8
Power Fail Transfer (PFT) .................................................................... 58
8.9
System Voice Memo ........................................................................... 58
8.10 Hot Desk ......................................................................................... 59
ii
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ...........................................................61
9.1
9.2
Access PBX or Centrex features............................................................. 61
Access the ISDN Network..................................................................... 61
9.2.1
Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features.............................. 61
9.2.2
Using ISDN Supplementary Services ............................................. 62
9.2.3
Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction.............................................. 62
10. FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS .....................................................................63
10.1 Entering Station Program Data............................................................... 63
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ......................................................... 63
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN .......................................................64
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES..............................................................70
iii
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone Speakerphone,
moves on to receiving and placing calls, and then to
more advanced features. Each section includes a brief
and basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System.
Under certain operating conditions, this equipment may
not be able to make emergency calls. Alternative
arrangements should be made for access to emergency
services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving
Calls, Placing Calls etc. Within each group, features
are arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
1.4
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8012D and LIP-8024D Phones (shown)
incorporate the latest in VoIP technology and user
interface to provide you with a cost effective, simple to
use, productive communications tool. It includes a large
3-line (LIP-8012D) or 4-line (LIP-8024D) 24-character
per line LCD (refer to Phone Diagrams, next page). The
bottom line of the display is an interactive menu
accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just below the display.
The Navigation button in the lower center of the Phone
allows you to move through the menu choices when
more than three selections are available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed
either using the Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting
a menu item using the Soft buttons. In the remainder of
this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown
with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double
underline.
The LCD display screens shown in this User Guide are
captured from the LIP-8024D. The screen may differ
slightly in the LIP-8012D.
iPECS LIP-8012D
iPECS LIP-8024D
2
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
iPECS LIP-8024D Diagram
1.5 LIP-8012D & 8024D Phone Installation
LIP Phones and Consoles can be connected to any
standard 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch port (shown in
graphic). When connected to an 802.3af compliant
switch port (ex., POE8), LIP Phones and series
consoles can derive power from the Ethernet port.
When LAN power is not available, the optional AC/DC
adaptor must be used. The following image shows how
to connect the handset, power cord, and LAN cable to
the phone.
1.5.1 Phone Connections
The LIP-8012D and LIP-8024D each have 2 RJ-45 and
10/100 Base-T LAN connection ports (refer to following
graphic). One port is for connecting to the LAN (‘D’ in
graphic), and the other can be connected to a desktop
data device such as a PC (‘B’ in graphic), or another
LAN interface terminal (refer to iPECS Hardware and
Installation Manual).
3
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
iPECS LIP-8012D & 8024D Connections
1.5.2 Wiring Connectors
The LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D each have two (2) 10/100
Base-T Ethernet ports, a “LAN” port and a “PC” port.
An intelligent switch, which implements voice packet
priority, connects the two (2) ports. This permits the
LAN to be shared between the LIP Phone and the
desktop PC or other Ethernet terminal without
significant affect on the voice or data traffic. The “LAN”
port is connected to the LAN as described above for the
single port Phones. The “PC” port is connected to a
desktop device using any standard straight through
category 5 cable.
1.5.3 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A) or over the LAN
cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
NOTE—LIP-8000 series consoles are powered through
the flat cable used to connect the console to the IP
4
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
phone (shown). Up to 2(without LIP-8048DSS) or 4(with
LIP-8048DSS) consoles can be chain-link connected to
the phone.DSS Connection to IP Phone
1.5.4 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions describe how to
perform a wall mount installation. For more information
on installing your LIP-8000 series phone, refer to the
iPECS Hardware Description and Installation
Manual.




Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall
anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and
tighten the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8inch) of the screw exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure
the phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and
tighten or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
5
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
2. LCD, Speakerphone
& Related Features
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES
2.1
Using the Display Menu
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the iPECS LIP8012D has three lines, and the LIP-8024D has four
lines of 24 characters each. The LCD is used to convey
information to you. It provides the date, time and station
number on the display while idle. It will also provide
called/calling name/number display, feature status and
an interactive menu to guide you through feature access
and User Program selections:
In iPECS-LIK
To activate the Display Menu:



Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the
OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. CONFERENCE ROOM PGM
3. ICM SMS
BACK
OK
4. NETWORK CONFIG
0. ATTENDANT
BACK
OK
In iPECS-MG
To activate the Display Menu:



Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the
OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
OK
6
EXIT
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
2.1.1 Phone Setting
In iPECS-LIK
To configure the Phone:


Press MENU button and 1 (Phone Setting),
The following menu displays:
1. STATION NAME PROGRAM
2. ICM RING
3. CO RING
BACK
OK
4. PASSWORD PROGRAM
5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM
6. STA RING DOWNLOAD
BACK
OK
7. BACKLIGHT
8. FONT PROGRAM
BACK
OK
 Station Name Program—Input up to 12 digits using the
keypad (press DND button to backspace/delete a character),
then press the OK Soft button. To input characters:
 Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or abc>
mode,
 To input the first character of a button, press the button 1
time (ex., for ‘a’, press 2 button once),
 To input the second character of a button, press the
button 2 times (ex., for ‘b’, press the 2 button twice.
 To input the third character of a button, press the button
3 times (ex., for ‘f’, press the 3 button three times.
 ICM Ring/CO Ring—Use Next Soft button to move through
list of ring types, and press OK Soft button to select.
 Password Program—Enter the current password and press
the OK Soft button, then enter the new password and press
the OK Soft button.
 Language Program—Use Navigation up/down buttons to
highlight available languages supported, and press OK Soft
button to select.
 Station Ring Download—Select the ring position (5-8) and
select the ring file; press the SAVE Soft button to select.
 Backlight—Use Navigation up/down buttons to select the
operation of the backlight, and press the OK Soft button to
select.
 Font Program— Use Navigation up/down buttons to select
the LCD Font, and press the OK Soft button to select.
7
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
 Set Font Type—Select the font type(0 for new roman, 1
for gothic), and press the OK Soft button to select.
 Set Contrast—Press the VOL   buttons or Use
Navigation up/down buttons to adjust the brightness,
then press the OK Soft button to select.
2.1.2 Conference Room (iPECS-LIK)
The User can create and delete Conference rooms.
To configure a Conference Room:


Press MENU button and 2 (Conference Room),
The following menu displays:
1. CREATE CONF ROOM
2. DELETE CONF ROOM





BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and
then press the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection,
Enter the room number and dial the password,
Press the OK Soft button.
8
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
2.1.3 ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK)
The user can send SMS messages to other stations and
retrieve received SMS messages.
To retrieve a SMS message:


Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)
BACK


OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and
then press the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection (2); the
messages will display.
To send a SMS message:




Select Mode - select 1 if resending a previous message,
or select 2 if sending a new message,
Enter the Station range (ex., 100-105=100105),
Enter message (if in mode 2),
Press the OK Soft button.
9
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
2.1.4 Network Config.
The User can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. settings:


Press MENU button and 2 (Network Config),
Enter the password (default=147*); the following will
display:
MFIM #[1/2] ?
MFIM #1 - CHANGE[#]



Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles
(MFIM),
Press the VOL   buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.
To set default Config. settings:

In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to
locate the Default Config. Screen (shown),

Press the * key.
SET DEFAULT CONFIG(DOT:*)
To exit Config. settings:



Press the SPEAKER button,
Press the * key to exit, or
Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new
setting.
10
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
2.1.5 Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK)
The Attendant menu is only available on the System
Attendant phone.
To access the Attendant menu:

Press MENU button and 5 (Attendant); the following will
display:
1. DATE/TIME SET
2. SET ICM ONLY MODE
3. RESTORE COS
BACK
OK
4. MONITOR CONF ROOM
5. DELETE CONF ROOM
BACK
OK
Date/Time Set—Enter mm/dd/yy, and press OK Soft
button; enter hh/mm, and press OK Soft button.
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM
only calls (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS
restoring (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Soft button.
Monitor Conference Room—Enter the Conference
Room number to view the number of attendees in the
Conference Room.
Delete Conference Room—Enter the Conference
Room number and press the OK Soft button to delete.
2.2
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except
for Paging) in place of lifting the handset to receive or
place calls.
Additionally, you may switch between the handset and
Speakerphone during a call. By keeping the handset
Off-hook, the Group Listen feature is activated, which
provides incoming audio over the speaker with outgoing
audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to
listen to both sides of the conversation without
interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute
the microphone using the MUTE button. When Mute is
active, the MUTE button LED will be illuminated. To turn
off Mute, press the MUTE button again..
11
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a
feature by pressing its button will activate the
Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the
ON/OFF-hook state for the phone.
To use the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:

Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook and sends
audio to the speaker and the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:

Press the ▼ VOLUME ▲ button.
To Mute the microphone:

Select the MUTE button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):

Press the MUTE button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:

2.3
Press the
SPEAKER
button.
Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset (LIP-8024D only)
The iPECS LIP-8024D may be equipped with a
Bluetooth Unit (BTU) allowing you to use a wireless
headset that supports Bluetooth version 2.0. Using a
headset permits you to move freely around the phone
(within approximately 10 meters) and maintain a
conversation. Before using the headset, the headset
must be “paired” with the BTU, and then the headset
must be enabled for use. Operation of the iPECS LIP8024D with the headset is the same as with the
Speakerphone; press the Speaker button to activate the
BTU to go ON and OFF-hook.
NOTE—When in pairing mode, the phone and the
Bluetooth unit should be within 1 meter proximity.
12
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To pair the wireless headset to the BTU:



Press the HEADSET button,
Dial 3(iPECS-LIK)/2(iPECS-MG),
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To enable/disable the wireless headset:









Set the Bluetooth headset to pairing mode,
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 1(enable).
Press the HOLD/SAVE button,
Press the Next soft button,
Press the OK soft button,
Enter the PIN code referring to the Bluetooth headset
manual (default=0000),
Press OK Soft button.
To unpair the BTU headset:





Set the Bluetooth headset to pairing mode,
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 2 (disable),
Press the OK soft button.
To check BTU paired information:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 3,
Press the OK soft button.
To use the BTU headset:



Press the SPEAKER button,
OR
Press the Call Start button on the BTU headset,
Place call as you normally would.
To answer a call with the BTU headset:



When an incoming call is received, ringing will be
present at the Station and the BT headset,
Press the BT Call Start button, or press the Speaker
button,
OR
Lift the handset.
NOTE—When the BTU is used for a call, the Speaker
button LED will illuminate and the speaker mode cannot
be used. If the phone handset is taken off-hook while in
13
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
BT mode, the voice path will directly be connected to
the handset; press the Speaker button to activate the
BTU headset.
2.4
Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012DSS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS
can be connected with the LIP-8012D or LIP-8024D
using the RS-232 cable. Be sure to verify the serial
DSS and LSS capacities with the iPECS System to
ensure usability (refer to iPECS Manual). The following
graphics show the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a serial
DSS.
LIP-8012DSS
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8048DSS
14
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To use a Serial DSS:







Verify the Station has Serial DSS Usage authority
(Admin PGM111-Flex21),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM115,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM129 (default label is
provided from MFIM).
To initialize Serial DSS Database:




Enter Admin PGM111-Flex21,
Select Station range to clear Serial DSS Database,
Dial 0,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To use a Serial DSS:







Set the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM126,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM126.
To initialize Serial DSS Database:


Clear the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Admin PGM120-Felx3 to reset the phone.
15
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
3. Receiving Calls
3. RECEIVING CALLS
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered by
lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line or a LOOP button.
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that
are programmed to ring at your phone. For external
calls, Delay Ring may be assigned allowing others to
answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc. will recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in Handsfree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available,
the name of the station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name
Display.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:

Lift the handset or press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:



In HF mode, simply speak as normal into the
microphone,
OR
In PV mode, lift the handset to respond.
16
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
3.2
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. In this case, audio is received from both
the active call and the Voice Over announcement at the
same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of
several ways; place the existing call on Hold and
respond to the new incoming call, activate One-time
DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new
call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:


Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:

Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:


3.3
Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
Select the desired message to send.
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can
screen the call as with a normal Answering Machine.
The caller’s voice is played over your speaker while the
message is being recorded. There are two methods of
notification and call screening provided, LED blink mode
or Speaker hearing mode.
Ring Mode(iPECS-Lik)/LED Blink Mode(iPECSMG)—the Answering Machine Emulation (AME) Flex
button will flash to notify you of a call. You may press
the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message
is stored.
17
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Speaker
Mode(iPECS-Lik)/Speaker
Hearing
Mode(iPECS-MG)—when the call is sent to the voice
mailbox, the caller’s voice is automatically broadcast
over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice
mail to record a message, talk with the caller and record
the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and
disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is only
available when using the iPECS VMIB Voice Mail; a
MUTE and AME button should be programmed (refer to
Appendix A User Program Codes).
3.4
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5th to
8th Ring Tone.
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:






Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone
(5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
18
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone (5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.

To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
 Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
3.5
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:


Lift the handset,
Dial 567(iPECS-Lik)/587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
To screen a call in Ring mode(iPECS-LIK)/LED blink
mode(iPECS-MG):
 Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is
broadcast over the station speaker and stored in the voice
mailbox (in the Speaker hearing mode, broadcast is
automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice
Mail:

Press the illuminated
SPEAKER
button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice
Mail:

Press the
MUTE
button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
 Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected
and the Voice Mail disconnected.
19
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
3.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:



Lift the handset,
Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the
call will be connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:


3.7
Lift the handset,
Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is
connected.
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb when you wish to not be
interrupted; the phone will block incoming calls. Internal
callers will receive a fast busy tone and the display will
show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while
ringing(One-Time DND); Ringing terminates and the
caller will get a fast busy tone and it requires a DND
button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:

3.8
Press the DND button.
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
20
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station,
except recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except
recalls, when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the
station is busy or does not answer within the
No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you
may need to enter your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
21
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another
phone or internal system resource:




Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:


Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different
phone within the System (Call Forward, Remote):






Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number &
Password),
Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:





Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number &
Password),
Press the # key.
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be
forwarded from an internal station or a remote location.
You may define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as
listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station,
except recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the
station, except recalls, when station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the
station is busy or does not answer within the
No Answer timer.
22
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, you may need to enter your
Authorization Code. In addition, from a remote location,
you must access the system through a DISA enabled
CO line.
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:






Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone within the
System:








Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a remote location:







Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
While receiving dial-tone, dial 554 (Call Forward
feature code),
Dial your Authorization Code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (6-9),
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
23
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:





Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone:







Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to internal callers. When calling
your Station, internal callers will automatically receive
the selected message or you can send a text message
you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to
24 characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant
and one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text
Messages; some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc.
(as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 03:
Message 04:
Message 05:
24
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
25
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 51,
Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:


Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 52,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:

Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
*1 Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
0-00
#
Character Entry Chart

Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
26
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 41,
Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:



Press the Fwd Soft button,
Press FWD button or dial 554,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 42,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
@
A
D
:
B
E
/
C
F
4
G
H
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
J
M
P
T
W
.
*
#
K
N
Q
U
X
,
<
Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
4
:
b
e
/
c
f
I
g
h
i
4
L
O
R
V
Y
?
j
m
p
t
w
.
*
#
k
n
q
u
x
,
l
o
r
v
y
?
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
S
Z
!
to save the message.
27
<
1
@
a
d
Character Entry Chart

Num
s
z
!
1
2
3
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
4. Placing Calls
4. PLACING A CALL
4.1
Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:



Lift the handset,
Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard,
begin speaking with the called party.
4.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
28
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing the last digit of the Intercom number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:

Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:

Press the MSG button and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:


Dial #,
After the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
4.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the message icon
will be displayed in the LIP-8024D. If the ring/message
LED is set to Message Wait Indication, the
ring/message LED will flash.
To activate Message Waiting:

4.2
Press the MSG button and hang-up.
External Calls
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access—
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-100, or 001200 for iPECS-300 & 600).
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or
001-240 for iPECS-MG300).
29
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
CO/IP Group access—
801-820 for iPECS-100, or 801-872 for iPECS300 & 600
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing (for banking
services, etc.).
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on
the least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
To place an external call:



Lift the handset,
Dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number.
30
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line becomes free.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:


Select the desired CO/IP line button; when the busy
notification is returned, press the MSG button,
Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
is available, the Station will be notified (ringing).
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. You may enter
an Account Code, which is output from the system to a
printer in the SMDR report. You may have an Account
Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex
buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:





Lift the handset,
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:



Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *.
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the station’s Authorization code.
31
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To activate Temporary COS:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization code,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a
phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the FLASH button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:





4.3
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization Code (station number and
password),
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Place call as normal.
Using Directory
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
32
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer. The iPECS Display Phone, the system will store
the numbers dialed on the last 15(iPECSLIK)/100(iPECS-MG) calls.
In iPECS-LIK
To dial the Last Number for an external call:





Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select
from the last 15 numbers dialed,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:







Lift the handset,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
or
press the LOG Soft button,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select
from the last 100 numbers dialed or received,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external
call to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient
dialing at a later time. The Saved number is stored until
a new number is saved.
33
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To place a call using Save Number Dial:



Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial 1 for Station
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:

While on an outgoing external call, press the Save Soft
button.
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800
System Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The
iPECS-300 & 600 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:




Lift the handset,
Press the DIR Soft button,
Press the speed button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial 2 for System
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200999 for iPECS-100, 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 & 600,
2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 , or 2000-3999 for iPECSMG300).
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated
memory for 20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-19)
34
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 support 100
Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-099). The
iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50 Station Speed
Dial numbers (bins 000-049).
These numbers are
entered at the user’s station and may include several
‘special’ instructions.
Special instructions and the
corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
FLASH as 1st digit—Activate dial tone detect.
FLASH not as 1st digit—The system will
generate a flash on the CO line.
MSG as 1st digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad
Facility message.
‘*’ as 1st digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover, the system will switch from
pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16 character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as in the
chart below.
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
*1 Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
0-00
#
Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK)
35
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Dial Pad
button
1
1
2
3
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
@
A
D
:
B
E
4
G
H
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
J
M
P
T
W
.
*
#
K
N
Q
U
X
,
/
C
F
<
Num
4
@
a
d
:
b
e
/
c
f
I
g
h
i
4
L
O
R
V
Y
?
j
m
p
t
w
.
*
#
k
n
q
u
x
,
l
o
r
v
y
?
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
S
Z
!
Character Entry Chart(iPECS-MG)
36
<
1
s
z
!
1
2
3
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:



Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (0019 , 000-099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and
Name:









Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Press the ADD Soft button,
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number to be stored,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the
Character Entry Chart,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex
button:








Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Select the Tel Num Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
Number(iPECS-MG),
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the
Character Entry chart(iPECS-LIK),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the Intercom
directory, you must enter a name for your station (up to
12 characters).
37
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To place a call using Dial by Name:




Press DIR Soft button,
Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2:
Public directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will
display the names in alphabetical order,
Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys, or enter
search characters (refer to the Character Entry Chart in
Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:








Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 74(iPECS-LIK)/12(iPECS-MG) (Station User Name
code),
Enter the Name, up to 12 characters (press DND
button to backspace/delete a character). To input
characters:
Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or abc>
mode,
To input the first character of a button, press the
button 1 time (ex., for ‘a’, press 2 button once),
To input the second character of a button, press the
button 2 times (ex., for ‘b’, press the 2 button twice.
To input the third character of a button, press the
button 3 times (ex., for ‘f’, press the 3 button three
times.
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)
When making an external call and a busy signal is
received, the system can be set to retry the number until
the call is connected, the feature is cancelled, or the
maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker
then place the call with the microphone muted. When
the remote end answers, you must select the MUTE
button, or lift the handset. Either of these actions will
cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the
remote party.
38
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To set up ACNR, while on an outgoing call:


Use the Navigation button to display the next menu
and select the ACNR Soft button,
Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:

Press the Stop Soft button.
39
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
5. Call Handling
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a
different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, Call Transfer. You can screen
the transfer with the receiving party (Screened Call
Transfer) or complete the transfer without screening
(Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:




5.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Call the transfer party,
Unscreened Call Transfer- Hang-up,
Screened Call Transfer– When call is answered or
Splash tone is heard, announce the call and hang-up.
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive
rates for the holding station and other iPECS Phone
users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
40
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To place a call on Hold:

5.3
Press
HOLD/SAVE .
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties, Broker Call. iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls (Broker Call):

5.4
Press the desired CO/IP line button.
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 24 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK).
The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
41
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To establish a Conference:





Establish call with one of the desired conference
parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Establish call with the other conference party,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the
conference.
To place a Conference on Hold:

Press the
HOLD/SAVE
button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:

Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:



Establish conference with two external parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Hand-up handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:


Lift the handset,
Select the Conf Soft button.
42
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room
(up to 12 digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:



Lift the handset,
Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:





5.5
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired user of
a parked call.
43
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601-619
for iPECS-300 & 600),
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:


Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit.
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:



5.6
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your
Voice Mail Box.
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:

Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu
and select the Record Soft button, record warning tone
is heard and recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:


Use the Navigation button to display the next menu,
and select the Record Soft button or,
Hang-up, return to idle.
44
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
6. Send & Retrieve
Messages
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES
6.1
Responding to a Station Message
Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication (MWI) when you do not answer or your phone
is in DND mode. The message icon will be displayed
on the LCD screen in LIP-8024D. If programmed, a
flashing MSG LED on the iPECS Phone also will
indicate when there is a Message Waiting. As a further
notification, a Message Wait Reminder Tone can be
provided. You may review and delete messages as well
as respond with a call back.
To review your Station messages:

Press the MSG button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
BACK
OK


Dial 1 to view Station messages,
Press the navigation up/down button to scroll through
the messages.
To return a call from the list of Intercom (MWI):


Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through
the Intercom messages,
Press the OK Soft button to select and place the return
call.
To delete a Station MWI:



Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through
the Station messages,
Press the Delete Soft button to select,
Dial 1 (Delete MWI).
To delete all Station MWIs:


6.2
Press the Delete Soft button,
Press 3 (Delete All MWIs).
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message. Your Voice Mail
45
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Box is part of the integrated VMIM/VSF/VMIB module,
the iPECS Feature Server or an external Voice Mail
system.
The Voice Mail system allows access to and
management of received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:




Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password
to receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the MSG button:

Press the flashing MSG button, the LCD shows the
Message Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
BACK
OK

Press the Navigation down key, to display additional
items:
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)
BACK




OK
Dial 2 for VMIM/VSF, 3 for external VM or 4 for Feature
Server Voice Mail,
After the prompt enter your station number and
password,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
46
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:







6.3
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered
by the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Auto Attendant,
At answer,
dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt
(iPECS-LIK),
dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),
Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number
of Messages’ prompt,
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up.
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (up to 100
alphanumeric characters) with other iPECS display
phone users.
These messages will activate the
message icon on the LCD (LIP-8024D). If the
ring/message LED is set to Message Wait indication,
the ring/message LED will flash.
47
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:






Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 36 (SMS send code),
Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a
new or edit an existing message,
Enter the station range to receive the message, to
send to a single station enter the station number twice,
Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each
character (refer to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK) in
Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:

Press the MSG button, and press the Navigation down
key four times (LIP-8012D) or three times (LIP8024D), the LCD will display the Message Summary
display,
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)


BACK
OK
Dial 5; the first two (LIP-8012D) or three (LIP-8024D)
SMS messages are shown in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS
message.
To delete received Short text messages:


Press the Delete Soft button,
Dial 1 to Delete the message, 2 to Cancel, or 3 to
Delete all received Short text messages.
48
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:







Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 43 (SMS send code),
Dial the station number to receive the message,
Press the Add Soft button to append the next station
number and Dial the station number,
Press the Finish Soft button,
Enter your mssage (refer to Character Entry
Chart(iPECS-MG) in Section 4.3.4),
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:

Press the Msg Soft button, the LCD will display the
Message Summary display,
MWI(00) VMS(00) SMS(01)
ENTER (MWI:1, VMS:2, SMS:3)


Dial 3 to view the SMS message.
Press the Next Soft button to view the next SMS
message.
To delete received Short text messages:

Press the Delete Soft button.
49
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
7. Remote System
Access
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS
7.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc).
To access system resources remotely:




7.2
Call the system’s DISA facility,
Await answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG),
Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive iPECS calls on a registered mobile phone. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
This feature is only effective with an ISDN CO line.
50
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To register a mobile phone number:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 37,
Dial the mobile phone number,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 38,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
System:


Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system
will check the Caller ID and answer the call. The user
then will receive intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:


Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and
the mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile may reconnect to the transfer
call by pressing the # key.
51
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 51,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s
station:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 52,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
System:


Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system
will check the Caller ID and answer the call. The user
then will receive intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:


Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and
the mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
52
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
8. Misc. Features
8. MISC. FEATURES
8.1
Call Log
Users can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls on the display (up to 99 records). A LOG Soft
button provides simple access to incoming (called),
outgoing (dialed) and missed (lost) calls.
NOTE—if a call is missed, the LOG Soft button will be
displayed as LOG(M); the missed call icon also will
appear on the LCD (LIP-8024D).
To access the Call Log menu:


Press the LOG Soft button,
Using the Navigation up/down keys, to view items
(Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D


BACK
SELECT
SEND ▶
Log codes include:
◀- Incoming call
▶- Outgoing call
- Missed call
To place a call using numbers stored in the Call Log:

From the Call Log, use the Navigation up/down keys, to
view items (Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D


BACK
SELECT
SEND ▶
Highlight the desired item, and press the Send Soft
button to place the call.
To save an external call to the Station Speed Dial:




Use the Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired external call item,
Press the Select Soft button,
Press the Save Soft button.
The CO code in a log item is used to seize the co line
when placing an external call using the call log. Up to 5
CO codes can be saved.
53
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
The first CO code is sent from the system in the saved
call log. Normally the first CO code is ‘9’, but if the
telephone number is equal to a number in the Speed
Dial list, the first CO code will be the access code of the
saved CO line of the speed dial. Therefore the first CO
code of each call log can be different and is not be
editable.
CO Codes 2 - 5 are the user-defined codes. If a code 2
- is selected, the selected code will be used in placing
all of the external calls in the call log.
To select a CO Code:

From the Call Log, use the right Navigation key, to
advance to the next 3 Soft button items,
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D

 DEL
CO CODE
Press the CO CODE Soft button (code displaying the +
symbol is the currently selected item),
1. +88001
2.


3.
BACK
EDIT
SELECT
To edit the CO code (positions 2-5 only):


Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Edit Soft button to modify selection.
To select the CO code:


8.2
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Select Soft button.
Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
LCD contrast can be adjusted to enhance viewing ability.
54
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To change the LCD Contrast:

8.3
While in an idle state, press the VOL   buttons to
adjust the brightness.
- increase (darker)
- decrease (brighter)
Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to
callers placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
To turn on Background Music:

8.4
Press
HOLD/SAVE
to cycle through the BGM selections.
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones
501-510 (iPECS
100), 501-535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
Internal All Call Page
543
External Page Zones
545-546
External All Call Page
548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page
543 + 00
External Page Zones
548
All Call Page
549
55
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:



Lift the handset,
Dial the desired Page zone,
If assigned, after page warning tone, make
announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK):


Press the MSG button,
Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:


8.5
Lift the handset.
Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page
code).
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:


Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all
groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):


Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out
code,
Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:


Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
56
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
8.6
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the
system. The alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or
as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/13(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock code),
Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting,
For a daily (repeating alarm), press #,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:



8.7
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/14(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock delete
code),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:

Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:


Lift the handset,
Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS-300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
57
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
8.8
Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally.
When PFT is
implemented, an SLT is connected to a CO line by the
system. This SLT can be used as any normal SLT,
providing service while power is out.
8.9
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the iPECS
Phone speaker and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all
message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
58
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To hear Date & Time memo:


Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time
is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:


Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station
150”.
To hear Station Settings:


Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
Station Status Memo is heard.
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
8.10
Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot
Desk operation. These Hot Desk phones let you log-on
and use the Hot Desk phone as if it were your station.
Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on the
attributes assigned to your station number and you can
make calls as normal. When logged-out, calls to your
station number are forwarded to the chosen destination.
59
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:


Lift the handset,
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and
Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial * twice,
Use the VOL   buttons to select a call forward
destination for your calls, speed dial, joined mobile
phone, VMIM/VSF, or VM group,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:



Lift the handset,
Dial 525
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and
Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 525,
Input Call forward destination number optionally
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
60
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
9. PBX, Centrex, &
ISDN Features
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES
9.1
Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:



Lift the handset,
Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex
CO line:


9.2
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu,
and select the Flash soft button,
After receiving new dial tone, dial the PBX/Centrex
feature code.
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN
features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial into
the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
61
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
To activate Keypad Facility operation:


Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to keypad
mode,
Dial as desired.
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:



Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
Press a Feature or Flex button.
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar
to those of Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary
services are provided on a subscription basis, and as
with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash button on
an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be
placed on Hold and a second call placed on the line.
You may then alternate between the two held calls
(Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line
conference can be established using the Flash and
Conf Soft buttons. A conference can also be placed on
hold.
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary
services:


Press Flash,
Press HOLD/SAVE , Conf, or CO line button to activate
the desired feature.
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the far-end. This may be a subscription
service of your carrier. Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:


Lift the handset,
Press programmed CLIR/COLR button to place call.
62
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
10. Features & Flex
Buttons
10.
10.1
FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS
Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B. In some cases, you
enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:



10.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone (possibly CO/IP lines).
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (ex., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan
code (refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group
number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Dial desired code and required inputs; for User
Program codes Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
63
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
In iPECS-LIK
FEATURE
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Intercom Call
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
Answering Machine
Emulation
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
562
564
562
564
562
564
565
566
565
566
565
566
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
64
REMARK
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
FEATURE
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
577
578
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
Call Parking Locations
601610
620659
66
601619
620667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
*66
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
65
SLT use
only
620-667
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
Individual CO/IP Line Access
REMARK
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) =
CO Line
number
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
FEATURE
iPECS100
iPECS300
iPECS600
REMARK
Door Open (3rd Door )
#*3
#*3
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
iPECS300 &
600
iPECS300 &
600
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference
Timer Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
#0
#0
#0
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
2
Name
Station Number
CO Group Access Code
3
Station Group Number
Code
Remark
100 ~ 4xx
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Attendant Call
Conference Room 1
Conference Room 2
Conference Room 3
Conference Room 4
Conference Room 5
Conference Room 6
Conference Room 7
Conference Room 8
Conference Room 9
0
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
11
Internal Page
543
66
Remark
543 + 00, xx
00: All Call Page
Xx: Page Group
#
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
Remark
548
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
PGM Mode Access
521
38
Two-Way Record
522
39
VMIB Access
523
40
AME Access
524
67
554 + Type +
Destination
514 + Type +
Destination
541 + xx
Xx: Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
41
CO Line Access
88
42
VM MWI Enable
*8
43
VM MWI Cancel
*9
44
MCID Request
*0
45
Unsupervised Conf Extend
5##
46
PTT Group Access
524
47
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
525
48
Name Register
526
49
Create Conf Room
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
Wake Up Cancel
530
53
Temporarily COS Down
531
54
Cancel Temp COS Down
532
55
Password Change
533
56
Inter-Phone Group Access
534
57
Call Wait Request
535
58
Preselected MSG PGM
536
59
Forced Handsfree Call
537
60
Call Based CLIR
582
61
CLIR Access
583
62
COLR Access
584
63
Pilot Hunt Call
585
64
Command Call Oneway
581
65
Command Call Conf
580
66
Intrude Register
589
67
Camp On Register
590
68
Remark
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO Line #
(001 ~ 200 : MG300
01 ~ 80 : MG100)
524 + (0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT Group
#
*: Log out
527 + Conf.
Room #
528 + Conf.
Room #
529 + HH:MM
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
68
OHVO Register
591
69
Mobile Num Register
592
70
Mobile CLI Register
593
71
Mobile Access
594
72
CCR Access
670
73
CCR Access And Drop
671
74
System Hold
560
75
Return Held CO
8**
76
Sys Memo
675
77
DISA Tone Service
678
78
All Feature Cancel
679
79
Add Conf Member
680
80
System Alarm Reset
565
81
Fault Alarm Reset
566
82
Door Open
#*1
83
Keypad Facility
##*
84
T-Net Log-In/Out
586
85
Universal Answer
587
86
USB Call Record
588
87
Delete All VM Message
681
88
VM Page Message Record
682
89
Direct VM Transfer
683
90
Loop Key
684
91
Call Log
685
69
Remark
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES
In iPECS-LIK
CODE
FUNCTION
REMARK
10
11 x
12 x
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3:
Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring
delay (0-9)
Select download Ring
Tone 0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
30
31
32
52 xx
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code
(Password) Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
70
Station number +up to
12 digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
CODE
FUNCTION
REMARK
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
71
72
73
74 x
75
76
78
79
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP
Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY
Button
Assign OHVO Button
SPEED Button Assignment
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button
Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
*0
**
*7
*8
*9
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
Register Bluetooth
Bluetooth Usage
77
89
8#
90
91
92
Input up to 7 characters
Requires VSF/External
SMDI VM
71
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS LIP-7000 only
iPECS
iPECS
iPECS
iPECS
iPECS
iPECS
LIP-7000
LIP-7000
LIP-7000
LIP-7000
LIP-7000
LIP-7000
only
only
only
only
only
only
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
12 +
Name
13 +
Time
14
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
User name creation
2 digit for each character
Set wake-up alarm time
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
15
Set language for the display
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
LIP-Series Only
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 +
MSG
number
[xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom #
Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm
& Auth
Code
55 + Rm
& Auth
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
Auth. Code required
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
72
LIP-8012D & LIP-8024D User Guide
Code
Function
Remarks
61
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
Code
LIP Series
73
LIP-8040L
User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
Date
Aug. 2008
Aug. 2010
Remark
Initial Release
Changed the new CI (LG-Ericsson)
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product, it means the product is
covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste
stream via designated collection facilities
appointed by government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will
help prevent potential negative consequences for
the environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of
your old appliance, please contact your city office,
waste disposal service or the shop where you
purchased the product.
Copyright© 2010 LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. Any unauthorized
reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly
prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. LG-Ericsson reserves the right to
make changes in specifications at any time without notice. The information
furnished by LG-Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but
is not warranted to be true in all cases. LG-Ericsson and iPECS are trademarks of
LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before
installing or attempting to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is
provided to alert the consumer of known dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your
phone to high humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only LG-Ericsson approved batteries and desktop chargers
to avoid the damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids
your warranty and may cause an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service
personnel shall install, replace or service
the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the
phone. If so, call the service center as
this may result in fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something
during use, unplug the power cord and
the phone line. Call the service center
immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not
touch the plug with wet hands. This may
result in a fire or an electric shock or
equipment damage.
6. Do not use the phone during a
thunderstorm. Lightning strike may
result in fire, severe electrical or
acoustic shock.
7. Do not use the power adapter if the
power cord or wall outlet is damaged.
This may result in fire or an electric
shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on
phone cords. This may injure children or
result in equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic
device which may attract pins or small
metal objects. Keep headset clear of
such objects and check before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area
that is excessively dusty, damp or
subject to vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is
well-ventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into
one power outlet. This may result in the
plug overheating and may result in a fire
or plug pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the
phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will
damage electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away
from heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do
not insert a screwdriver or any metal
objects into the phone. This may cause
electric shock or damage the equipment
and will render the warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry
cloth only. Do not use volatile liquids
such as petrol, alcohol, or acetone as
this may cause a fire or result in
discoloration or damage to plastics. Do
not clean with wax or silicon products as
these may enter the equipment and
cause operation to become unstable.
LIP-8040L User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.
General................................................................................1
Feature Information..................................................................1
Feature Groupings...................................................................1
iPECS LIP-8040L Phone Description .............................................2
LIP-8040L Phone Installation ......................................................3
1.5.1 Power .........................................................................4
1.5.2 Wall Mount ...................................................................4
LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ............................................6
2.1 Using the LCD........................................................................6
2.2 Display Menu .........................................................................6
2.2.1 Phone Setting................................................................8
2.2.2 Conference Room...........................................................9
2.2.3 ICM SMS ................................................................... 10
2.2.4 Network Config ............................................................ 11
2.2.5 Attendant menu ........................................................... 12
2.3 Using the Speakerphone ......................................................... 12
2.4 Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset............................................ 13
2.5 Using a Serial DSS ................................................................ 15
3. RECEIVING CALLS .....................................................................................18
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Answering a Call While Idle ...................................................... 18
Responding to a Call While Busy................................................ 19
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) .................................. 19
Differential Ring Signals .......................................................... 20
Answering Calls at Night.......................................................... 22
Answering Calls to Other Stations............................................... 22
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls ........................ 22
Forwarding Calls ................................................................... 23
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail .................... 23
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number................................ 24
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message ................................. 26
4. PLACING A CALL .......................................................................................30
4.1 Internal Calls ....................................................................... 30
4.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station .......................... 30
4.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait ................................................. 31
i
LIP-8040L User Guide
4.2 External Calls ...................................................................... 31
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls.......................................... 31
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line .............................. 33
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing.................... 33
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ........................................ 33
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ................. 34
4.3 Using Directory..................................................................... 34
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ....................................... 34
4.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ............................... 35
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers .................................... 36
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers .................... 36
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name ........................ 39
4.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR) ..................... 40
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING .................................42
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ....................... 42
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state...................................... 42
Broker Call: Switching between two calls ...................................... 43
Joining Multiple People in a Conference ....................................... 43
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room ......................................... 44
5.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page ...................................... 45
5.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call ............................................. 46
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES ...................................................................47
6.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication ........................ 47
6.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages .................................................... 48
6.3 Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages................................. 49
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS .........................................................................51
7.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................... 51
7.2 Mobile Phone Extension .......................................................... 51
8. MISC. FEATURES.......................................................................................54
8.1 Call Log ............................................................................. 54
8.2 Contrast ............................................................................. 56
8.3 Background Music and Music on Hold.......................................... 56
8.4 Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ................................. 57
8.5 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page ........................................................ 58
8.6 Wake-Up Alarm .................................................................... 58
8.7 Alarm/Door Bell .................................................................... 59
8.8 Power Fail Transfer (PFT)........................................................ 59
8.9 System Voice Memo .............................................................. 59
8.10 Hot Desk ............................................................................ 60
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ...........................................................62
ii
LIP-8040L User Guide
9.1 Access PBX or Centrex features ................................................ 62
9.2 Access the ISDN Network ........................................................ 62
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features................... 62
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services .................................. 63
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction................................... 63
10. FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS .....................................................................64
10.1 Entering Station Program Data .................................................. 64
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ............................................. 64
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN .......................................................65
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES..............................................................71
iii
LIP-8040L User Guide
1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advancedtechnology, highly-versatile, fully-featured telecom
system designed to make office communications easy
and productive. Employing state-of-the-art Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and data
converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal
operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide
simple and straightforward. The guide starts with the
simpler operations of the iPECS Phone Speakerphone,
moves on to receiving and placing calls, and then to
more advanced features. Each section includes a brief
and basic description of each feature and step-by-step
operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s
base default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering
Plan may be different. Some features may not be
available for you to access or may be subject to certain
limitations based on the set-up of the System (refer to
your System Administrator, or the iPECS Technical
Manuals for further information).
NOTE—Under certain operating conditions, this
equipment may not be able to make emergency
calls. Alternative arrangements should be made for
access to emergency services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a
logical and consistent sequence so that features can be
quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving
Calls, Placing Calls, etc. Within each group, features
1
LIP-8040L User Guide
are arranged according to the difficulty of operation and
frequency of use.
1.4
iPECS LIP-8040L Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8040DL Phone (shown) incorporate the
latest in VoIP technology and user interface to provide
you with a cost effective, simple to use, productive
communications tool. It includes a large 9-line 24character per line LCD (refer to Phone Diagrams, next
page). The bottom line of the display incorporates an
interactive menu accessed with the 3 Soft buttons just
below the display. The Navigation button in the lower
center of the Phone allows you to move through the
menu choices when more than three selections are
available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed
either using the Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting
a menu item using the Soft buttons. In the remainder of
this User Guide, the Fixed or Flexible buttons are shown
with a box surrounding the BUTTON designation while
Soft button menu selections are shown with a double
underline.
iPECS LIP-8040L Front and Back View
2
LIP-8040L User Guide
iPECS LIP-8040L Diagram
1.5
LIP-8040L Phone Installation
The phone handset is attached as shown (A). The LIP8040L has 2 RJ-45 and 10/100 Base-T LAN connection
ports (shown). One port is for connecting to the LAN (D),
and the other can be connected to a desktop data
device or PC (B), or another LAN interface terminal.
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
iPECS LIP-8040L Connections
3
LIP-8040L User Guide
1.5.1 Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the
AC/DC Adapter-K- (48 VDC @0.3A; shown “C” in
previous graphic) or over the LAN cable using the POE8
or other 802.3af compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone
to the LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted
into the power-input jack in the underside of the Phone.
One end of the AC power cord is inserted into the
mating receptacle of the AC Adapter, and the other end
is inserted into the AC power outlet.
NOTE—LIP-8000 series consoles are powered through
the flat cable used to connect the console to the IP
phone (shown). Up to 2(without LIP-8048DSS) or
4(with LIP-8048DSS) consoles can be chain-link
connected to the phone. DSS Connection to IP Phone
1.5.2 Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as
needed. The following instructions describe how to
perform a wall mount installation. For more detailed
instruction, refer to the iPECS Hardware Description
and Installation Manual.
4
LIP-8040L User Guide




Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall
anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and
tighten the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8inch) of the screw exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure
the phone is secure.
NOTE—It may be necessary to remove the phone and
tighten or loosen the screws for a secure mounting.
5
LIP-8040L User Guide
2. LCD, Speakerphone
& Related Features
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES
2.1
Using the LCD
The iPECS LIP-8040L has a large 9-line, 24 character
across Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) which is divided
into 3 sections. The upper section consists of 3 lines.
nd
rd
The first line displays various icons. The 2 and 3 line
are used to convey information to you. They provide the
date, time and station number display while idle. It will
also provide called/calling name/number display, feature
status, etc.
The middle section displays the string of flex button or a
monthly calendar. The user can select by pressing
CALENDR Soft button of next page in idle state.
The lower section, which consists of a single line, is an
interactive menu to guide you through feature access
and User Program selections. The Navigation button is
used to move through Display Menu items.
STATION 1003
(T)
JUL 31 06
12:41 pm
CO 001
CO 006
CO 002
CO 007
CO 003
CO 008
CO 004
CO 009
CO 005
CO 010
FWD
DIR
LOG▶
2.2
Display Menu
With the Display Menu, you can access the Network
Configuration menu as well as other phone features
through simple menu trees. The Display Menu is
activated using the Menu button.
6
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate the Display Menu:



Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the
OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
Select (0-4)
1. PHONE SETTING
2. CONFERENCE ROOM PGM
3. ICM SMS
4. Network Config
0. Attendant
BACK
OK
NOTE—The ‘0. Attendant’ selection
display on the System Attendant phone.
will
In iPECS-MG
To activate the Display Menu:



Press MENU button,
Press the Navigation up/down buttons and press the
OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the associated digit (Menu selections shown):
1. PHONE SETTING
2. NETWORK CONFIG
BACK
EXIT
OK
7
only
LIP-8040L User Guide
2.2.1 Phone Setting
In iPECS-LIK
To configure the Phone:


Press MENU button and 1 (Phone Setting),
The following menu displays:
Select (1-8)
1. STATION NAME PROGRAM
2. ICM RING
3. CO RING
4. PASSWORD PROGRAM
5. LANGUAGE PROGRAM
BACK
OK
Select (1-8)
6. STA RING DOWNLOAD
7. BACKLIGHT
8. FONT PROGRAM


BACK
OK
Station Name Program—Input up to 12 digits using the
keypad (press DND button to backspace/delete a
character), then press the OK Soft button. To input
characters:
o Press the second Soft button to select ABC> or
abc> mode,
o To input the first character of a button, press
the button 1 time (ex., for ‘a’, press 2 button
once),
o To input the second character of a button, press
the button 2 times (ex., for ‘b’, press the 2
button twice.
o To input the third character of a button, press
the button 3 times (ex., for ‘f’, press the 3
button three times.
ICM Ring/CO Ring—Use Next Soft button to move
through list of ring types, and press OK Soft button to
select.
8
LIP-8040L User Guide





Password Program—Enter the current password and
press the OK Soft button, then enter the new password
and press the OK Soft button.
Language Program—Use Navigation up/down buttons
to highlight available languages supported, and press
OK Soft button to select.
Station Ring Download—Select the ring position (5-8)
and select the ring file; press the SAVE Soft button to
select.
Backlight—Use Navigation up/down buttons to select
the operation of the backlight, and press the OK Soft
button to select.
Font Program— Use Navigation up/down buttons to
select the LCD Font, and press the OK Soft button to
select.
In iPECS-MG
 Set Font Type—Select the font type(0 for new roman,
1 for gothic), and press the OK Soft button to select.
 Set Contrast—Press the VOL   buttons or Use
Navigation up/down buttons to adjust the brightness,
then press the OK Soft button to select.
2.2.2 Conference Room (iPECS-LIK)
The User can create and delete Conference rooms.
To configure a Conference Room:


Press MENU button and 2 (Conference Room),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. CREATE CONF ROOM
2. DELETE CONF ROOM





BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and
then press the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial the number associated to the selection,
Enter the room number and dial the password,
Press the OK Soft button.
9
LIP-8040L User Guide
2.2.3 ICM SMS (iPECS-LIK)
The user can send SMS messages to other stations and
retrieve received SMS messages.
To send a SMS message:


Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)





BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and
then press the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial 1 to send a message,
Dial 1 if resending, or 2 to send a new message (edit),
Enter the Station number and message (if sending
message),
Press the OK Soft button.
To retrieve a SMS message:


Press MENU button and 3 (ICM SMS),
The following menu displays:
SELECT (1-2)
1. SEND MESSAGE
2. IN BOX(03)






BACK
OK
Press the Navigation up/down keys to highlight and
then press the OK Soft button to select,
OR
Dial 2 to retrieve a message.
Dial 1 to send a message,
Dial 1 if resending, or 2 to send a new message (edit),
Enter the Station number and message (if sending
message),
Press the OK Soft button.
10
LIP-8040L User Guide
2.2.4 Network Config
The User can review the current network configuration
or modify a new phone network configuration.
To access Network Config. settings:


Press MENU button and 4 (Network Config),
Enter the password (default=147*); the following will
display:
MFIM #[1/2] ?
MFIM #1 - CHANGE[#]

Press the # key to toggle between multiple profiles
(MFIM),
Press the VOL   buttons to advance to the next
network configuration item,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button to save each setting.


To set default Config. settings:

In Network Config. Menu, use VOL   buttons to
locate the Default Config. Screen (shown),
SET DEFAULT CONFIG(DOT:*)

Press the * key.
To exit Config. settings:



Press the SPEAKER button,
Press the * key to exit,
OR
Press the # key to Reset/Reboot the phone with new
setting.
11
LIP-8040L User Guide
2.2.5 Attendant menu (iPECS-LIK)
The Attendant menu is only available on the System
Attendant phone.




2.3
Set ICM Only Mode—Dial the Station Range for ICM
only calls (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Soft button.
Restore COS—Dial the Station Range for COS
restoring (ex., 103-108=103108), and press the OK
Soft button.
Monitor Conference Room—Enter the Conference
Room number to view the number of attendees in the
Conference Room.
Delete Conference Room—Enter the Conference
Room number and press the OK Soft button to delete.
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except
for Paging) in place of lifting the handset to receive or
place calls.
To access the Attendant menu:


From the Attendant Station phone, press the MENU
button,
Press 0 (Attendant); the following will display:
SELECT (1 - 5)
1. DATE/TIME SET
2. SET ICM ONLY MODE
3. RESTORE COS
4. MONITOR CONF ROOM
5. DELETE CONF ROOM
BACK

OK
Date/Time Set—Enter mm/dd/yy, and press OK Soft
button; enter hh/mm, and press OK Soft button.
12
LIP-8040L User Guide
Additionally, you may switch between the handset and
Speakerphone during a call. By keeping the handset
Off-hook, the Group Listen feature is activated, which
provides incoming audio over the speaker with outgoing
audio from the handset. This permits a local ‘group’ to
listen to both sides of the conversation without
interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute
the microphone using the MUTE button. When Mute is
active, the MUTE button LED will be illuminated. To turn
off Mute, press the MUTE button again.
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a
feature by pressing its button will activate the
Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the
ON/OFF-hook state for the phone.
To use the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:

Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook and sends
audio to the speaker and the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:

Press the VOL▲ VOL▼ button.
To Mute the microphone:

Select the MUTE button.
To turn off Mute (turn the microphone ON):

Press the MUTE button.
To activate Group Listen while on an active handset call:

2.4
Press the
SPEAKER
button.
Using a Bluetooth Wireless Headset
The iPECS LIP-8040L may be equipped with a
Bluetooth Unit (BTU) allowing you to use a wireless
headset that supports Bluetooth version 2.0. Using a
headset permits you to move freely around the phone
(within approximately 10 meters) and maintain a
conversation. Before using the headset, the headset
must be “paired” with the BTU, and then the headset
must be enabled for use. Operation of the iPECS LIP8040L with the headset is the same as with the
13
LIP-8040L User Guide
Speakerphone; press the Speaker button to activate the
BTU to go ON and OFF-hook.
NOTE—during the pairing operation, the headset
and phone should be as close as possible but not
more than 1 meter apart.
To pair the wireless headset to the BTU:



Press the HEADSET button,
Dial 3(iPECS-LIK)/2(iPECS-MG),
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To enable/disable the wireless headset:









Set the Bluetooth headset to pairing mode,
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 1 (enable),
Press the HOLD/SAVE button,
Press the Next soft button, to select the headset,
Press the OK soft button,
Enter the PIN code referring to the Bluetooth headset
manual (default=0000),
Press OK Soft button.
14
LIP-8040L User Guide
To unpair the BTU headset:





Set the Bluetooth headset to pairing mode,
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 2 (disable),
Press the OK soft button.
To check BTU paired information:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial *8(iPECS-LIK)/63(iPECS-MG),
Dial 3,
Press the OK soft button.
To use the BTU headset:



Press the SPEAKER button,
OR
Press the Call Start button on the BTU headset,
Place call as you normally would.
To answer a call with the BTU headset:



When an incoming call is received, ringing will be
present at the Station and the BT headset,
Press the BT Call Start button, or press the Speaker
button,
OR
Lift the handset.
NOTE—When the BTU is used for a call, the Speaker
button LED will illuminate and the speaker mode
cannot be used. If the phone handset is taken offhook while in BT mode, the voice path will directly
be connected to the handset; press the Speaker
button to activate the BTU headset.
2.5
Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012DSS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS
can be connected with the LIP-8040L using the RS-232
cable. Be sure to verify the serial DSS and LSS
capacities with the iPECS System to ensure usability
(refer to iPECS Manual). The following graphics show
the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a
serial DSS.
15
LIP-8040L User Guide
LIP-8012DSS
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8048DSS
In iPECS-LIK
To use a Serial DSS:







Verify the Station has Serial DSS Usage authority
(Admin PGM111-Flex21),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM115,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM129 (default label is
provided from MFIM).
To initialize Serial DSS Database:



Enter Admin PGM111-Flex21,
Select Station range to clear Serial DSS Database,
Dial 0, and press the HOLD/SAVE button.
16
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To use a Serial DSS:







Set the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Verify the DSS power is OFF (LIP-8048DSS only),
Power-OFF the phone,
Connect the serial DSS to the phone,
Power-ON the phone and the DSS (LIP-8048DSS only),
Program the DSS button using Web Admin
Programming or PGM126,
Edit LSS label from Admin PGM126.
To initialize Serial DSS Database:


Clear the Station’s Serial DSS Usage Map (Admin
PGM120-Flex2),
Admin PGM120-Felx3 to reset the phone.
17
LIP-8040L User Guide
3. Receiving Calls
3. RECEIVING CALLS
3.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls;
internal/external ringing calls, Intercom Voice
Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line
Preference; in this case, calls that ring are answered by
lifting the handset. Otherwise, you must press the
flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the
CO/IP line or a LOOP button.
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that
are programmed to ring at your phone. For external
calls, Delay Ring may be assigned allowing others to
answer the call before the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another
user; if providing call coverage for other users, you may
also receive Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls,
etc. will recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the
ICM Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in Handsfree (HF) mode, after the splash tone and
announcement, speak normally into the microphone. In
the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset to respond. The
ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in Station
Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available,
the name of the station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name
Display.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:

Lift the handset or press the flashing Flex button (as
needed), the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:


In HF mode, simply speak as normal into the
microphone,
OR
In PV mode, lift the handset to respond.
18
LIP-8040L User Guide
3.2
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a
Muted Ring, Camp-On tones, or Voice-Over
announcements. Muted Ring is provided over the
speaker of your Phone indicating a Call Waiting. You
also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of tones on
top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to
your phone. In this case, audio is received from both
the active call and the Voice Over announcement at the
same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of
several ways; place the existing call on Hold and
respond to the new incoming call, activate One-time
DND, send a Silent Text Message, or ignore the new
call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button
(not available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to
announce a call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:


Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:

Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:


3.3
Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
Select the desired message to send.
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can
screen the call as if using a normal Answering Machine.
The caller’s voice is played over your speaker while the
message is being recorded. There are two methods of
notification and call screening provided, Ring or
Speaker mode.
Ring mode(iPECS-Lik)/LED Blink Mode(iPECSMG)—the Answering Machine Emulation (AME) Flex
button will flash to notify you of a call. You may press
19
LIP-8040L User Guide
the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message
is stored.
Speaker
mode(iPECS-Lik)/Speaker
Hearing
Mode(iPECS-MG)—when the call is sent to the voice
mailbox, the caller’s voice is automatically broadcast
over the speaker of your iPECS Phone.
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice
mail to record a message, talk with the caller and record
the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and
disconnect the Voicemail. The AME feature is only
available when using the iPECS VMIM/VSF Voice Mail;
a MUTE and AME button should be programmed (refer
to Appendix A User Program Codes).
To screen a call in Ring mode(iPECS-LIK)/LED blink
mode(iPECS-MG):

Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is
broadcast over the station speaker and stored in the
voice mailbox (in the Speaker mode, broadcast is
automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice
Mail:

Press the illuminated
SPEAKER
button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in
Voice Mail:

Press the
MUTE
button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message
recording:

3.4
Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is
connected and the Voice Mail disconnected.
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be
difficult to tell which are ringing. The iPECS Phone has
14 Ring Tones available for differentiating one phone’s
ringing from another. Four of the tones are stored in the
phone permanent memory; the remaining ten tones are
in the system memory. Four of these ten can be
th
downloaded into the phone memory for use as the 5 to
th
8 Ring Tone.
20
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:






Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 5 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone
(5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
In iPECS-MG
To download a Ring Tone from System memory:






Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 3 for Ring Tone download,
Dial the phone’s memory location to receive the tone
(5-8),
Dial 0-9 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to download.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:






Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 2 for Ring Tones,
Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
Dial 1 for Keyset Ring Source,
Dial 1-8 for the desired tone number; a confirmation
tone is heard,
Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
21
LIP-8040L User Guide
3.5
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to
send ring signals to external bells. You may answer
these calls with Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:


3.6
Lift the handset,
Dial 567 (iPECS-Lik)/ 587(iPECS-MG) (UNA code).
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up
(answer) the call. Select to answer a call ringing at a
specific station (Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may
choose to answer the oldest call ringing to your station
group (Group Call Pick-Up). Assign a Flex button with
the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing
station Private Line unless the line appears on your
phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:



Lift the handset,
Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the
call will be connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:


3.7
Lift the handset,
Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is
connected.
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb when you wish to not be
interrupted; the phone will block incoming calls. Internal
callers will receive a fast busy tone and the display will
show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while
ringing(One-Time DND); Ringing terminates and the
caller will get a fast busy tone and it requires a DND
button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded
to the paired Secretary automatically.
22
LIP-8040L User Guide
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate
DND Override and Intrude on an active call. The
Attendants may also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:

3.8
Press the DND button.
Forwarding Calls
3.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the
system. Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF
Voice Mail and External Voice Mail. Your LCD and
the LCD of the forward receiver will both indicate the
forward status.
Call Forward can be activated from your phone or from
a different station (Call Forward, Remote). You may
define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station,
except recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except
recalls, when the station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the
station is busy or does not answer within the
No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may
need to enter your Authorization Code.
23
LIP-8040L User Guide
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a
station with an appearance of the Private Line or to
Voice Mail.
To activate Call Forward from your phone to another
phone or internal system resource:




Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of forward code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward from your phone:


Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To activate Call Forward for your phone from a different
phone within the System (Call Forward, Remote):






Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number &
Password),
Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
Dial the destination number.
To deactivate Call Forward, Remote:





Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (Station number &
Password),
Press the # key.
3.8.2 Forwarding calls to an external number
Forward calls to an external destination; calls can be
forwarded from an internal station or a remote location.
You may define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as
listed below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station,
except recalls, are forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls to the
station, except recalls, when station is busy.
24
LIP-8040L User Guide
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station,
except recalls, when the station does not
answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the
station is busy or does not answer within the
No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station or a
remote location, enter your Authorization Code. In
addition, from a remote location, you must access the
system through a DISA enabled CO line.
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:






Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone within the
System:








Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a remote location:







Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
While receiving dial-tone, dial 554 (Call Forward
feature code),
Dial your Authorization Code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (6-9),
Dial Speed Dial bin number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
25
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from your phone:





Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an
external number) from a different phone:







Lift the handset,
Press the Fwd Soft button or dial 554,
Dial 0 (Remote Call Forward code),
Dial your Authorization code (your Station number +
Password),
Dial the type of Forward code (1-4),
Dial Telephone number,
Replace the handset, return to idle.
3.8.3 Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to
return a ‘Text Message’ to internal callers. When calling
your Station, internal callers will automatically receive
the selected message or you can send a text message
you select in response to an internal call, Silent Text
Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and
one assigned by you.
In addition, there are ten fix Pre-Defined Text
Messages; some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc.
(as shown in message list).
In iPECS-LIK
Message 01:
Message 02:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03:
Message 04:
26
LIP-8040L User Guide
Message 05:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Message 06:
Message 07:
Message 08:
Message 09:
Message 10:
In iPECS-MG
Message 1:
Message 2:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
AT HOME
AT BRANCH OFFICE
User Custom Message
Deactive
Message 3:
Message 4:
Message 5:
Message 6:
Message 7:
Message 8:
Message 9:
Message 0:
*
#
27
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 51,
Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:


Press the Fwd Soft button,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 52,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
*1 Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
0-00
#
Character Entry Chart

Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
28
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 41,
Dial the one-digit text Message code (0-9),
Dial any auxiliary input for messages 1-4 and 6-8,
Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:



Press the Fwd Soft button,
Press FWD button or dial 554,
Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your
station:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial User Program feature code 42,
Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Dial Pad
button
1
1
2
3
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
@
A
D
:
B
E
/
C
F
4
G
H
I
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
J
M
P
T
W
.
*
#
K
N
Q
U
X
,
L
O
R
V
Y
?

Press
<
<
1
:
b
e
/
c
f
g
h
i
4
l
o
r
v
y
?
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
to save the message.
29
4
@
a
d
j
k
m
n
S
p
q
t
u
Z
w
x
!
.
,
*
#
Character Entry Chart
HOLD/SAVE ,
Num
s
z
!
1
2
3
LIP-8040L User Guide
4. PLACING A CALL
4. Placing Calls
4.1
Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over
the Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice
Announce call, a splash tone will be heard. Ring or
Voice Announce is normally determined by settings at
the called station but you may change this by dialing ‘#’
after placing the call. By changing the mode, a Voice
Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF
button allows you to call another station with the single
touch of a button. The button LED will display the other
station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another
station or system resource automatically. This Prime
Line Preference may be immediate or delayed allowing
you to take other actions during the delay. Otherwise,
you may press another Flex button before going offhook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone
will time-out, and after the Howler tone is received,
your phone will be placed out-of-service in Intercom
Lock-Out; you then must hang-up to return the phone
to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:



Lift the handset,
Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard,
begin speaking with the called party.
4.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On,
Callback or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On
allows you to wait off-hook for the called station to
answer. Callback allows you to hang-up, and when the
busy station returns to an idle state, the system will call
30
LIP-8040L User Guide
your Station; after you answer the callback, the system
will call the previously busy station.
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next
station by dialing the last digit of the Intercom number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:

Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:

Press the MSG button and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:


Dial #,
After the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
4.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode,
you may leave a Message Wait. The called user will
receive a Message Wait indication; the message icon
will be displayed. If the ring/message LED is set to
Message Wait Indication, the ring/message LED will
flash.
To activate Message Waiting:

4.2
When calling a number that is busy or in DND mode,
press the MSG button and hang-up.
External Calls
4.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’
are accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone
assigned as a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The
CO/IP lines are grouped for different types of calls, local,
long distance, etc. Using the CO/IP line group code,
you will be able to access any line from the group. A
Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a LOOP
button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes
for access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access—
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-100, or 001200 for iPECS-300 & 600).
31
LIP-8040L User Guide
or
88 + Line number (01-80 for iPECS-MG100, or
001-240 for iPECS-MG300).
CO/IP Group access—
801-820 for iPECS-100, or 801-872 for iPECS300 & 600
or
801-824 for iPECS-MG100, or 801-872 for iPECSMG300
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line which uses pulse style
signals, you may activate Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover changing to DTMF style dialing (for banking
services, etc.).
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address
using the ‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial
will be analyzed and the system will place the call on the
least expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line
Access Restrictions, in which case you will receive
error tone if you attempt to dial or access a restricted
number/CO/IP line. CO/IP line and Station Class Of
Service (COS), which establish dialing restrictions, may
vary during Day and Night operation (Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before
placing calls, in which case you will receive a second
dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time
Restrictions, you will receive a Call Warning Tone
prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned
Emergency numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed
from any station in the System, regardless of a
Station’s dialing restrictions (COS).
32
LIP-8040L User Guide
To place an external call:



Lift the handset,
Dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number.
4.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you
will receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request
to be notified when a line is available for use.
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:


Select the desired CO/IP line button; when the busy
notification is returned, press the MSG button,
Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line
is available, the Station will be notified (ringing).
4.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to
track calls for billing or other purposes. You may enter
an Account Code, which is output from the system to a
printer in the SMDR report. You may have an Account
Code Flex button (refer to Assigning features to Flex
buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:





Lift the handset,
Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:



Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
Press *.
4.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating
Temporary COS, which will disable all dialing from the
33
LIP-8040L User Guide
phone. To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter
the station’s Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 21(iPECS-LIK)/31(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization code(iPECS-MG),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To deactivate Temporary COS:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 22(iPECS-LIK)/32(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization code,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a
phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by
activating Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing
restriction levels are applied for a single call only. For
multiple calls, you will need to reactivate Walking COS
or use the Flash Soft button to regain CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:





4.3
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 23(iPECS-LIK)/33(iPECS-MG) (User Program
code),
Dial your Authorization Code (station number and
password),
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG)
Place call as normal.
Using Directory
4.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
34
LIP-8040L User Guide
The last number dialed on an external call is
automatically saved in the Last Number Redial (LNR)
buffer. The iPECS Display Phone, the system will store
the numbers dialed on the last 15(iPECSLIK)/100(iPECS-MG) calls.
In iPECS-LIK
To dial the Last Number for an external call:





Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select
from the last 15 numbers dialed,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
In iPECS-MG
To dial the Last Number for an external call:







Lift the handset,
Press Speed Soft button,
Dial *,
or
press the LOG Soft button,
Press the Navigation up and down buttons to select
from the last 100 numbers dialed or received,
Press the Send Soft button or HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call
to the Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing
at a later time. The Saved number is stored until a new
number is saved.
To place a call using Save Number Dial:



Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial 1 for Station
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:

While on an outgoing external call, press the Save Soft
button.
35
LIP-8040L User Guide
4.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800
System Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The
iPECS-300 & 600 systems each have memory allocated
for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-4999).
The iPECS-MG100 system has memory allocated for
1000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-2999).
The iPECS-MG300 system has memory allocated for
2000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-3999).
You may, if allowed, use System Speed Dial to call
frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups
called System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you
may access some numbers and not others and your
dialing restrictions may be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial
numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:




Lift the handset,
Press the DIR Soft button,
Press the speed button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial 2 for System
Speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number (200999 for iPECS-100 or 2000-4999 for iPECS-300 &
600) ,2000-2999 for iPECs-MG100 , or 2000-3999 for
iPECS-MG300).
4.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated
memory for 20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 0019) each up to 48 digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 support
100 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-099). The
iPECS-MG 100 & 300 each support 50 Station Speed
Dial numbers (bins 000-049). These numbers are
entered at the user’s station and may include several
‘special’ instructions.
Special instructions and the
corresponding button are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
FLASH as 1st digit—Activate dial tone detect.
36
LIP-8040L User Guide
FLASH not as 1st digit—The system will
generate a flash on the CO line.
MSG as 1st digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad
Facility message.
‘*’ as 1st digit—Display Security, the stored
number will not be displayed when used.
‘*’ not as 1st digit—Dial Pulse to Tone
Switchover, the system will switch from
pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16-character name may
be associated with the number for Dial by Name.
Characters are entered with two keystrokes as shown.
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
*1 Blank
*2 - :
*3 - ,
0-00
#
Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK)
37
LIP-8040L User Guide
Dial Pad
button
1
1
2
3
Letter Type
Uppercase
Lowercase
(ABC)
(ABC)
Button depressions
2
3
4
1
2
3
<
:
b
e
/
c
f
g
h
i
4
@
A
D
:
B
E
/
C
F
4
G
H
I
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
J
K
L
j
k
l
M
N
O
m
n
o
P
Q
R
S
p
q
r
s
T
U
V
t
u
v
W
X
Y
Z
w
x
y
z
.
,
?
!
.
,
?
!
*
*
#
#
Character Entry Chart(iPECS-MG)
38
@
a
d
Num
<
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
LIP-8040L User Guide
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:



Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19
or 000-099 or 000-049).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and
Name:









Lift the handset, and/or press the DIR Soft button,
Press the Speed Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
station speed(iPECS-MG),
Press the ADD Soft button,
Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number to be stored,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the
Character Entry Chart,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex
button:








Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Select the Tel Num Soft button(iPECS-LIK)/Dial ‘1’ for
Number(iPECS-MG),
Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
Dial the desired number,
Press HOLD/SAVE ,
Enter the associated name if desired, using the
Character Entry chart(iPECS-LIK),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name
Dial by Name employs three different Directories:
Private directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory
(System Speed dial), or Intercom directory.
39
LIP-8040L User Guide
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the Intercom
directory, you must enter a name for your station (up to
12 characters).
To place a call using Dial by Name:




Press DIR Soft button,
Dial the desired directory, 1: Private directory, 2:
Public directory, 3: Intercom directory, the LCD will
display the names in alphabetical order,
Scroll using the Navigation up/down keys, or enter
search characters (refer to the Character Entry Chart in
Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to place the call.
To enter your station user name:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 74(iPECS-LIK)/12(iPECS-MG) (Station User Name
code),
Enter the Name, up to 12 characters (press DND
button to backspace/delete a character):
- To input alphabet
1. Select ABC> or abc> mode by pressing 2nd Soft
Button,
2. To input 1st character in each dial button(2~9), press
the button, once,
To input 2nd character, press the button, twice,
To input 3rd character, press the button, three times,
(Ex., To input ‘K’, press the ‘5’ button, twice).
3. To input a character in the same button, continuously
press the button after 2 seconds.
(Ex., in case of KL, press the ‘5’ button twice, then
wait 2 seconds and press the ‘5’ button three times).
Press HOLD/SAVE .
4.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)
When making an external call and a busy signal is
received, the system can be set to retry the number until
the call is connected, the feature is cancelled, or the
maximum number of retries is attempted—this is
Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker
then place the call with the microphone muted. When
the remote end answers, you must select the MUTE
button, or lift the handset. Either of these actions will
40
LIP-8040L User Guide
cancel the ACNR request as well as connect you to the
remote party.
To set up ACNR, while on an outgoing call:


Use the Navigation button to display the next menu
and select the ACNR Soft button,
Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:

Press the Stop Soft button.
41
LIP-8040L User Guide
5. Call Handling
5. TRANSFER, CONFERENCE & OTHER CALL HANDLING
5.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a
different destination
You can send an active call to another station or other
resource of the system, Call Transfer. You can screen
the transfer with the receiving party (Screened Call
Transfer) or complete the transfer without screening
(Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in
Transfer Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold
(MOH) and will recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or
DND, it may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:




5.2
Press TRANS/PGM ,
Call the transfer party,
Unscreened Call Transfer- Hang-up,
Screened Call Transfer– When call is answered or
Splash tone is heard, announce the call then hang-up.
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one
of several holding states. In System Hold, other nonrestricted stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive
Hold, only the holding station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System
or Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference
by pressing the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates
for the holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a
DSS/BLF button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then
recall the user. This Hold Recall is provided with a
different ring signal. If not answered in a timely manner,
the Attendant will receive Attendant Hold Recall.
42
LIP-8040L User Guide
To place a call on Hold:

5.3
Press
HOLD/SAVE .
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on
Hold, placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker
between two or more parties (Broker Call). iPECS
Phone users may ‘broker’ for multiple calls up to the
number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls (Broker Call):

5.4
Press the desired CO/IP line button.
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3
parties(iPECS-LIK)/13 parties(iPECS-MG), or 24 parties
when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM)(iPECS-LIK). The other parties in the
Conference may be internal or external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to
Hold Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2
external parties in a private conversation. This is an
Unsupervised Conference, which is not subject to the
normal Hold Recall operation.
To establish a Conference:





Establish call with one of the desired conference
parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Establish call with the other conference party,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Select the Conf Soft button again to establish the
conference.
43
LIP-8040L User Guide
To place a Conference on Hold:

Press the
HOLD/SAVE
button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:

Select the Conf Soft button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:



Establish conference with two external parties,
Select the Conf Soft button,
Hang-up the handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:


Lift the handset,
Select the Conf Soft button.
5.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9
Conference Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24
parties converse when using a MCIM. When setting up
a Conference Room, a password can be designated for
invited parties (internal and external parties) to use for
accessing the established Conference Room.
In iPECS-LIK
To set-up a Conference Room:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room
(up to 12 digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:




Lift the handset,
Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room Number,
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
44
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To set-up a Conference Room:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 54 to create a Conference Room,
Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579),
If desired enter a password for the Conference Room
(up to 12 digits),
Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:



Lift the handset,
Dial 571-579 (Conference Room entry code),
Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:





5.5
Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 55 (Conference Room delete code),
Dial the Conference Room number (571-579),
Dial the Conference Room password,
Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special
holding location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed
easily from any station in the system. Typically, this
feature is used with Paging to notify the desired user of
a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call
Park timer.
In iPECS-LIK
To park an active external call:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS-100, or 601-619
for iPECS-300 & 600),
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:


Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit.
45
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To park an active external call:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:



5.6
Lift the handset,
Dial the Park Orbit (541),
Dial the Park number (00-49)
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your
Voice Mail Box.
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:

Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu
and select the Record Soft button, record warning tone
is heard and recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:


Use the Navigation button to display the next menu,
and select the Record Soft button or,
Hang-up, return to idle.
46
LIP-8040L User Guide
6. Send & Retrieve
Messages
6. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES
6.1
Responding to a Station Message
Waiting Indication
Another station can leave a Station Message Waiting
indication (MWI) when you do not answer or your phone
is in DND mode. The message icon will be displayed on
the LCD screen. If programmed, a flashing MSG LED
on the iPECS Phone also will indicate when there is a
Message Waiting. As a further notification, a Message
Wait Reminder Tone can be provided. You may
review and delete messages as well as respond with a
call back.
To review your Station messages:

Press the MSG button, the LCD shows the Message
Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(00)
BACK
OK


Dial 1 to view Station messages,
Press the navigation up/down button to scroll through
the messages.
To return a call from the list of Intercom (MWI):


Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through
the Intercom messages,
Press the OK Soft button to select and place the return
call.
To delete a Station MWI:



Press the navigation up/down buttons to scroll through
the Station messages,
Press the Delete Soft button to select,
Dial 1 (Delete MWI).
To delete all Station MWIs:


Press the Delete Soft button,
Press 3 (Delete All MWIs).
47
LIP-8040L User Guide
6.2
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail
Box, they can leave a voice message, as part of the
integrated VMIM/VSF/VMIB module, the iPECS
Feature Server or an external Voice Mail system.
The Voice Mail system allows access to and
management of received voice messages. While in
your Mail Box, you have control of your password and
Mail Box greeting. In addition, you can remotely control
Call Forward for your station from the VMIM/VSF/VMIB.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your
station to access the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Voice messages.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using a Flex button:




Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password
to receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To retrieve Voice Mail locally using the MSG button:









Press the flashing MSG button, the LCD shows the
Message Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(00)
BACK
OK
Dial 2 for VMIM/VSF, 3 for external VM or 4 for Feature
Server Voice Mail, etc.
After the prompt enter your station number and
password,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
Press the programmed VOICE MAIL Flex button,
Dial your Mail Box number and corresponding password
to receive the ‘Number of Messages’ prompt,
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
48
LIP-8040L User Guide
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:







6.3
Lift the handset,
Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered
by the VMIM/VSF/VMIB Auto Attendant,
At answer,
dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’ prompt
(iPECS-LIK),
dial 523 (VMIB Access Code)(iPECS-MG),,
Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number
of Messages’ prompt,
Dial ‘*’ (iPECS-MG),
Dial desired option codes,
At completion of session, hang-up.
Sending and Receiving Short Text Messages
You can exchange short text messages (up to 100
alphanumeric characters) with other iPECS display
phone users. If there are messages, the message icon
will be displayed on the LCD screen in LIP-8024D. If the
ring/message LED is set to Message Wait Indication
(PGM111-FLEX10), the ring/message LED will flash.
In iPECS-LIK
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:






Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 36 (SMS send code),
Dial 1 to resend an existing message, or 2 to send a
new or edit an existing message,
Enter the station range to receive the message, to
send to a single station enter the station number twice,
Dial your message using 2 key strokes for each
character (refer to Character Entry Chart(iPECS-LIK) in
Section 4.3.4).
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
49
LIP-8040L User Guide
To view your received Short text messages:



Press the MSG button, the LCD will display the
Message Summary display:
1. ICM MWI(002)
2. VSF MSG(002)
3. VMS MSG(001)
4. UMS MSG(003)
5. ICM SMS(003)
BACK
OK
Dial 5; the first few SMS messages are shown in brief,
Dial the Message number to view the entire SMS
message.
To delete received Short text messages:


Press the DELETE Soft button,
Dial 1 to Delete the message, 2 to Cancel, or 3 to
Delete all received Short text messages.
In iPECS-MG
To send an SMS message to another iPECS display
Phone:







Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 43 (SMS send code),
Dial the station number to receive the message,
Press the Add Soft button to append the next station
number and Dial the station number,
Press the Finish Soft button,
Enter your mssage (refer to Character Entry
Chart(iPECS-MG) in Section 4.3.4),
Press HOLD/SAVE to send your message.
To view your received Short text messages:

Press the Msg Soft button, the LCD will display the
Message Summary display,
MWI(00) VMS(00) SMS(01)
ENTER (MWI:1, VMS:2, SMS:3)


Dial 3 to view the SMS message.
Press the Next Soft button to view the next SMS
message.
To delete received Short text messages:

Press the Delete Soft button.
50
LIP-8040L User Guide
7. Remote System
Access
7. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS
7.1
Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote
users to gain access to the system’s resources (remote
users may be required to enter an Authorization Code).
The system will recognize remote user dialed inputs
(call other stations, place calls over CO/IP lines, review
voice mails, etc).
To access system resources remotely:




7.2
Call the system’s DISA facility,
Await answer and dial your authorization code (station
number and password),
Dial “*” for end mark (iPECS-MG)
Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and
receive iPECS calls on a registered mobile phone. You
may need to activate the Mobile Phone Extension
feature and assign the Mobile Phone number.
51
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-LIK
To register a mobile phone number:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 37,
Dial the mobile phone number,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 38,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
System:


Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system
will check the Caller ID and answer the call. The user
then will receive intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:



Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and
the mobile phone returns to idle.
Reconnect to the transfer by pressing the # key.
NOTE— This feature is only effective with an ISDN
CO line.
52
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
To register a mobile phone number:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 51,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s
station:





Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 52,
Select Mobile Index 1 or 2,
Dial the mobile phone number with CO Access code,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS
System:


Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system
will check the Caller ID and answer the call. The user
then will receive intercom dial tone,
Place internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the
iPECS:


Dial the mobile flash digit “*” while on an iPECS call,
Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and
the mobile phone returns to idle.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the
transfer call by pressing the mobile flash digit(*).
53
LIP-8040L User Guide
8. Misc. Features
8. MISC. FEATURES
8.1
Call Log
Users can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls on the display (up to 99 records). A LOG Soft
button provides simple access to incoming (called),
outgoing (dialed) and missed (lost) calls.
NOTE—if a call is missed, the LOG Soft button will be
displayed as LOG(M); the missed call icon also will
appear on the LCD.
To access the Call Log menu:



Press the LOG Soft button,
Use the Navigation up/down keys, to view items
(Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
BACK
SELECT SEND
▶
Log codes include:
◀- Incoming call
▶- Outgoing call
- Missed call
To place a call using numbers stored in the Call Log:


From the Call Log, use the Navigation up/down keys, to
view items (Called, Dialed, or Lost),
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
BACK
SELECT SEND
▶
Highlight the desired item, and press the Send Soft
button to place the call.
54
LIP-8040L User Guide
To save an external call to the Station Speed dial:



Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired external call item,
Press the Select Soft button,
Press the Save Soft button.
The CO code in a log item is used to seize the co line
when placing an external call using the call log. Up to 5
CO codes can be saved.
The first CO code is sent from the system in the saved
call log. Normally the first CO code is ‘9’, but if the
telephone number is equal to a number in the Speed
Dial list, the first CO code will be the access code of the
saved CO line of the speed dial. Therefore the first CO
code of each call log can be different and is not be
editable.
CO Codes 2 - 5 are the user-defined codes. If a code 2 is selected, the selected code will be used in placing all
of the external calls in the call log.
To select a CO Code:


From the Call Log, use the right Navigation key, to
advance to the next 3 Soft button items,
01. ▶ CO1 01112345678
02. ◀ 101
03.
CO2 LEE K D
04. ▶ KIM M J
05.
103
DEL
CO CODE
Press the CO CODE Soft button (code displaying the +
symbol is the currently selected item),
1. +88001
2.
3.
4.
5.
BACK
EDIT
SELECT
55
LIP-8040L User Guide
To edit the CO code (positions 2-5 only):


Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Edit Soft button to modify selection.
To select the CO code:


8.2
Use Navigation up/down buttons to highlight the
desired item,
Press the Select Soft button.
Contrast (iPECS-LIK)
LCD contrast can be adjusted to enhance viewing ability.
To change the LCD Contrast:

8.3
While in an idle state, press the VOL  VOL  buttons
to adjust the brightness.
- increase (darker)
- decrease (brighter)
Background Music and Music on Hold (iPECS-LIK)
Two audio sources can be connected to the system.
These sources or an internal source provide input for
Background Music (BGM) and Music On Hold (MOH).
In addition, a recorded message from the VMIM can be
used. BGM is played over the speakers of the iPECS
Phone when the station is idle. MOH is played to callers
placed on Hold.
There are four possible selections for BGM and MOH:
1: Off
2: Source BGM1
3: Source BGM2
4. VMIM message
To turn on Background Music:

Press
HOLD/SAVE
to cycle through the BGM selections.
56
LIP-8040L User Guide
8.4
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other
stations and/or external speakers.
Stations are
assigned to one or more of the Internal Page Zones.
The system has two External Page Zones that can be
connected to external speakers.
In iPECS-LIK, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones
501-510 (iPECS
100), 501-535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
Internal All Call Page
543
External Page Zones
545-546
External All Call Page
548
All Call Page
549
In iPECS-MG, Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
543 + Zone No(01~15) (iPECS-MG100)
543 + Zone No(01~30) (iPECS-MG300)
Internal All Call Page
543 + 00
External Page Zones
548
All Call Page
549
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to
be recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users
can also request a paged party answer the Page using
Meet-Me Paging. In this case, the paged party may
answer the page from any phone in the system by
dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:



Lift the handset,
Dial the desired Page zone,
If assigned, after page warning tone, make
announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received(iPECS-LIK):


Press the MSG button,
Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:


Lift the handset.
Dial 544(iPECS-LIK)/546(iPECS-MG) (Meet-Me-Page
d )
57
LIP-8040L User Guide
8.5
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or
more of the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page
groups. Users separately log-in or log-out of any one or
all PTT groups to which the phone is assigned. Once
logged in, place or receive one-way page
announcements to/from other users who are logged in
to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:


Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG),
Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all
groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):


Dial #0(iPECS-LIK)/538(iPECS-MG), the PTT Log-in/out
code,
Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:


8.6
Press and hold the PTT Flex button,
After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
Wake-Up Alarm
iPECS supports an Alarm clock for each station in the
system. The alarm clock can be set to repeat daily or
as a one-time alarm.
When responding to the alarm by lifting the handset,
BGM will be provided.
To set the Wake Up Alarm clock:





Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 41(iPECS-LIK)/13(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock code),
Dial 2-digit hour and minute (hh/mm) for alerting,
For a daily (repeating alarm), press #,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
To erase Wake-Up:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial 42(iPECS-LIK)/14(iPECS-MG) (Alarm Clock delete
code),
Press HOLD/SAVE .
58
LIP-8040L User Guide
8.7
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell
contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a
unique Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be
received. To restart the monitor circuit, the external
contacts must be deactivated and the Alarm Ring signal
terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst)
may be received each time the external contact is
activated. A system contact also can be assigned to act
as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:

Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:


Lift the handset,
Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the
iPECS -300 & 600. Contacts 1 is available in the
iPECS -MG.
8.8
Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation
may be provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail
Transfer (PFT). When battery back-up is provided the
station will operate normally. When PFT is implemented,
an SLT is connected to a CO line by the system. This
SLT can be used as any normal SLT, providing service
while power is out.
8.9
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several
Voice Memos to provide Station Users with general
information such as station number, date, time, and
feature status. Voice Memos are heard over the iPECS
Phone speaker and over the handset for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are
reported:
59
LIP-8040L User Guide
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all
message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
To hear Date & Time memo:


Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, or *661
for iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+1 for iPECS-MG),
Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time
is xx:xx pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:


Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, or *662 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+2 for iPECS-MG),
The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station
150”.
To hear Station Settings:


Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, or *663 for
iPECS-300 & 600, or 675+3 for iPECS-MG),
Station Status Memo is heard.
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
8.10 Hot Desk
iPECS phones in the system may be assigned for Hot
Desk operation. These Hot Desk phones let you log-on
and use the Hot Desk phone as if it were your station.
60
LIP-8040L User Guide
Once logged-on, the Hot Desk station will take on the
attributes assigned to your station number and you can
make calls as normal. When logged-out, calls to your
station number are forwarded to the chosen destination.
In iPECS-LIK
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:


Lift the handset,
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and
Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial * twice,
Use the VOL   buttons to select a call forward
destination for your calls, speed dial, joined mobile
phone, VMIM/VSF, or VM group,
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
In iPECS-MG
To Log on to a Hot Desk station:



Lift the handset,
Dial 525
Dial your Authorization Code (Station Number and
Password).
To Log out of the Hot Desk station:




Press the TRANS/PGM button,
Dial 525,
Input Call forward destination number optionally
Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
61
LIP-8040L User Guide
9. PBX, Centrex, &
ISDN Features
9. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES
9.1
Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host
PBX system or Centrex services from your service
provider. The iPECS connects to a host with analog CO
lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an
extension of the host, allowing access to the host
system features using the host dial codes. While on a
call, use the iPECS Flash feature to transfer calls to
other host extensions or access features of the host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to
regain dial tone from the CO line without relinquishing
control of the CO line to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:



Lift the handset,
Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex
CO line:


9.2
Use the Navigation button to display the next menu,
and select the Flash soft button,
After receiving new dial tone, dial the PBX/Centrex
feature code.
Access the ISDN Network
9.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN
features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services
requires that dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data
and not tones. In this case, dialed digits are sent as
‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the
Flex Button program procedures. Once active, dial into
the ISDN for services; however, actions other than
dialing will deactivate the Keypad Facility operation.
62
LIP-8040L User Guide
To activate Keypad Facility operation:


Press the programmed
to keypad mode,
Dial as desired.
KEYPAD FACILITY
button to switch
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:



Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
Press a Feature or Flex button.
9.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar
to those of Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary
services are provided on a subscription basis, and as
with Centrex, are accessed using the Flash button on an
iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services an ISDN line can be
placed on Hold and a second call placed on the line.
You may then alternate between the two held calls
(Broker Call) using the hold button. An ISDN line
conference can be established using the Flash and Conf
Soft buttons. A conference can also be placed on hold.
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary
services:


Press Flash,
Press HOLD/SAVE , Conf, or CO line button to activate
the desired feature.
9.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of
Caller ID to the far-end. This may be a subscription
service of your carrier. Separate Flex buttons are
required to activate outgoing, Connected Line (COL),
and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID) restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:


Lift the handset,
Press programmed CLIR/COLR button to place call.
63
LIP-8040L User Guide
10. Features & Flex
Buttons
10.
FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS
10.1 Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users
to assign certain attributes such as Authorization Codes
(Passwords). After entering the User Program mode,
dial the codes to select the attribute and setting. Once
selected, the setting is saved. A list of the User
Program codes, the feature/function and any input
required are given in Appendix B. In some cases, you
enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:



Press TRANS/PGM ,
Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
10.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex
buttons on your iPECS Phone (possibly CO/IP lines).
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features
providing One-Touch feature activation (ex., a Flex
button may be assigned to access the Account Code
feature and may include the Account code digits).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan
code (refer to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a
User Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group
number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:




Press TRANS/PGM ,
Press the desired Flex button,
Dial desired code and required inputs; for User
Program codes Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
Press HOLD/SAVE .
64
LIP-8040L User Guide
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN
In iPECS-LIK
FEATURE
iPECS
-300
100399
501535
543
544
545546
548
549
550
iPECS600
10001599
501-535
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
iPECS
-100
100169
501510
543
544
545546
548
549
550
Flash Command to CO Line
551
551
551
Last Number Redial
552
552
552
DND (Toggle On/Off)
553
553
553
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
554
555
554
555
554
555
Message Wait/Callback Enable
556
556
556
Message Wait/Callback Return
557
557
557
Speed Dial Access
558
558
558
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
559
559
559
CO System Hold
560
560
560
Program Mode Access
561
561
561
Attendant Unavailable
Answering Machine
Emulation
Alarm Reset
562
564
562
564
562
564
565
565
565
Intercom Call
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
65
REMARK
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
SLT use
only
LIP-8040L User Guide
FEATURE
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Parking Locations
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
iPECS
-100
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
iPECS
-300
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
iPECS600
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
577
578
577
578
579
579
579
59
600
59
600
59
600
601610
620659
66
601619
620667
*66
601-619
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
*66
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held CO/IP
8*
8#xx
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
0
*8
*9
0
*8
*9
66
SLT use
only
620-667
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001200
8*
8#xxx
Individual CO/IP Line Access
REMARK
8*
8#xxx
xx(x) =
CO Line
number
LIP-8040L User Guide
FEATURE
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
iPECS
-100
#*1
#*2
#*3
iPECS
-300
#*1
#*2
#*3
iPECS600
#*1
#*2
#*3
Door Open (4th Door )
#*4
#*4
#*4
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference
Timer Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
*0
564
##
#0
#0
#0
REMARK
iPECS300 &
600
iPECS300 &
600
In iPECS-MG
1) Basic Number
No
1
Name
Code
100 ~ 4xx
Station Number
2
9,
801 ~ 872(MG-300)
801 ~ 824(MG-100)
620 ~ 669(MG-300)
620 ~ 639(MG-100)
CO Group Access Code
3
Remark
Station Group Number
2) Feature Code
No
Feature Name
Code
1
2
Attendant Call
Conference Room 1
0
571
3
Conference Room 2
572
4
Conference Room 3
573
5
Conference Room 4
574
6
Conference Room 5
575
7
Conference Room 6
576
8
Conference Room 7
577
9
Conference Room 8
578
10
Conference Room 9
579
67
Remark
LIP-8040L User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
11
Internal Page
543
12
Personal VM Page
544
13
Announcement Page For Attendant
545
14
Page Auto Answer
546
15
547
16
Internal Page Answer
(Meet-Me Page)
External Page
17
Internal-External Page All
549
18
Call Forward Register
554
19
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register
514
20
Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel
515
21
DND Status Change
516
22
DND Delete
517
23
Account Code
550
24
CO Flash
551
25
Last Number Redial
552
26
Station Speed PGM
553
27
Speed Dial
555
28
MWI Register
557
29
MWI Answer
558
Remark
543 + 00,
xx
00: All Call
Page
Xx: Page
Group #
548
30
MWI Cancel
559
31
Call Back Register
518
32
Call Back Cancel
519
33
Group Call Pickup
564
34
Direct Call Pickup
7
35
Walking COS
520
68
554 + Type
+
Destination
514 + Type
+
Destination
LIP-8040L User Guide
No
Feature Name
Code
36
Call Parking Location
541
37
38
39
40
41
PGM Mode Access
Two-Way Record
VMIB Access
AME Access
CO Line Access
521
522
523
524
88
42
43
44
45
46
VM MWI Enable
VM MWI Cancel
MCID Request
Unsupervised Conf Extend
PTT Group Access
*8
*9
*0
5##
524
47
48
49
Hot Desk Log In/Log out
Name Register
Create Conf Room
525
526
527
50
Delete Conf Room
528
51
Wake Up Register
529
52
53
Wake Up Cancel
Temporarily COS Down
530
531
69
Remark
541 + xx
Xx:
Parking
Location
(00 ~ 49)
88 + xxx
Xxx: CO
Line #
(001 ~
200 : MG300
01 ~
80 : MG100)
524 +
(0~9,*)
0 ~ 9: PTT
Group #
*: Log out
527 +
Conf.
Room #
528 +
Conf.
Room #
529 +
HH:MM
LIP-8040L User Guide
No
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
Feature Name
Code
Cancel Temp COS Down
Password Change
Inter-Phone Group Access
Call Wait Request
Preselected MSG PGM
Forced Handsfree Call
Call Based CLIR
CLIR Access
COLR Access
Pilot Hunt Call
Command Call Oneway
Command Call Conf
Intrude Register
Camp On Register
OHVO Register
Mobile Num Register
Mobile CLI Register
Mobile Access
CCR Access
CCR Access And Drop
System Hold
Return Held CO
Sys Memo
DISA Tone Service
All Feature Cancel
Add Conf Member
System Alarm Reset
Fault Alarm Reset
Door Open
Keypad Facility
T-Net Log-In/Out
Universal Answer
USB Call Record
Delete All VM Message
VM Page Message Record
Direct VM Transfer
Loop Key
Call Log
532
533
534
535
536
537
582
583
584
585
581
580
589
590
591
592
593
594
670
671
560
8**
675
678
679
680
565
566
#*1
##*
586
587
588
681
682
683
684
685
70
Remark
LIP-8040L User Guide
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES
In iPECS-LIK
CODE
10
11 x
12 x
FUNCTION
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
15 x
Station Ring Download
19
21
Ear&Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
22
Restore Station COS
23
Walking COS
30
31
32
52 xx
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code
(Password) Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
53 x
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
REMARK
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3:
Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring
delay (0-9)
Select download Ring
Tone 0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
May require Authorization
code
May require Authorization
code
71
Station number +up to
12 digits, no Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
password
Input Conf Room (1-9) &
optional password
LIP-8040L User Guide
CODE
FUNCTION
62 x
Headset Ring Mode
71
72
73
74 x
75
76
78
79
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP
Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
80
Assign RECORD Button
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
93
94
95
96
97
98
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY
Button
Assign OHVO Button
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button
Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
99
Assign PTT Button
*0
**
*7
*8
*9
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
Register Bluetooth
Bluetooth Usage
77
89
8#
91
92
REMARK
1: Speakerphone, 2:
Headset, 3: both
Input up to 12 characters
Requires VSF/External
SMDI VM
72
LIP-8040L User Guide
In iPECS-MG
Code
Function
Remarks
11
12 +
Name
13 +
Time
14
Intercom Answer Mode
1:H, 2:T, 3:P
User name creation
2 digit for each character
Set wake-up alarm time
HH/mm,
24-hour clock
15
Set language for the display
00-14
16
LCD Date Mode Change
DD/MM/YY or MMDDYY
17
LCD Time Mode Change
12 Hour/24 Hour
18
Set Backlight
0-2
Cancel Wake-up Alarm
21
ICM Ring Type
22
TRK Ring Type
23
Ring Download
24
Back Ground Music
31
Temporary COS
Auth. Code required
32
Auth. Code required
34
Retrieve COS
COS Override
(Walking COS)
Register Password
35
Call Log Protect
36
41 +
MSG
number
[xx]
42
SMS Message Protect
LIP-Series/LDP6000-Series
Set Pre-defined Message.
0-9, MSG
*: User Custom #
Deactivation
43
Send SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
44
Receive SMS Message
LIP Series/LDP6000 Series
51 + x
Activate a mobile phone
X=1-2
52 + x
Register the mobile number
X=1-2
53 + x
54 + Rm
& Auth
Code
55 + Rm
Register the mobile CLI number
X=1-2
33
LIP-Series Only
Auth. Code required
Create a Station User Message
Start a Conf Room
Close a Conf Room
73
LIP-8040L User Guide
Code
& Auth
Code
61
Function
Remarks
Speaker/Headset Mode
Speak/Headset/E-MIC
62
Headset Ring Mode
Speaker/Headset/Both
71
Register Station ICLID
72
View Station ICLID
81
View IP Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
82
View Mac Address
IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM
83
View IP Phone version
80
Network Setting
91
System Version
92
System IP Address
LIP Series
74
● IP KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM / SLT User Guide iPECS-50/100/300/600/1200
SLT User Guide for iPECS System
Placing an Outside Call
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 9.
( In the following countries, dial 0 to access
CO line : Italy/Norway.
In the New Zealand, dial 1 to access CO line)
Dial the desired number.
Call Wait (Camp-on)
●
●
●
Making a Screened Transfer
●
Placing an Intercom Call
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial intercom number.
●
●
Placing an Outside Call on Hold
●
●
While connected to an extension call, press
hook switch.
Dial 5 6 0, the System Hold feature code.
Retrieving a Held Outside Call
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 8 # and CO line number.
iPECS-50, iPECS-100: 01~42
iPECS-300: 001~200
iPECS-600: 001~400
iPECS-1200 : 001~600
You can dial 8 * in case you
don’t remember the held CO number.
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 8 and CO group number.
iPECS-50, iPECS-100: 01~20
iPECS-300/600: 01~72
iPECS-1200 : 001~200
Dial the desired number.
While connected to an outside line, press
hook switch.
Dial the desired extension number and wait to be
answered.
Announce the call.
Hang up to complete call transfer.
Making an Unscreened Transfer
●
●
●
While connected to an outside line, press
hook switch.
Dial the desired extension number
Hang up to complete call transfer.
Last Number Redial
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 5 2, the SLT Last Number Redial code.
Storing Station Speed Dial Numbers
●
●
Placing an Outside Call via CO Group
Access
After receiving intercom busy tone, dial *.
Camp-on tone is heard in the called station.
When called party answers, talk or hang up to
transfer the call.
●
●
●
●
●
Dial 5 6 1 , the SLT Programming code.
Dial 5 5 8 , the SLT Speed Dial access code .
Dial speed dial number.
(00~19 in iPECS50/iPECS100,
000~099 in iPECS300/600/1200)
Dial the CO/IP line/group access code.
Dial speed dial number you wish to store.
Press hook switch.
You will hear confirmation tone and hang up.
Using Station Speed Dial Numbers
Placing an Outside Call via CO Individual
Access
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 8 8 and CO line number.
iPECS-50, iPECS-100: 01~42
iPECS-300: 001~200
iPECS-600: 001~400
iPECS-1200 : 001~600
Dial the desired number.
Re-directing an Incoming Call
(Call Pick-up)
When you hear a phone ringing in your area,
● Lift handset.
● Dial 7.
● Dial the extension number of the ringing phone.
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 5 8.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
(00~19 in iPECS-50/100,
000~099 in iPECS-300/600/1200)
Group Call Pick-up
When hearing an unattended phone ringing in your
area,
● Lift handset.
● Dial 5 6 6.
● You will be connected to an incoming extension or
outside line call. (You should be in the same pick-up
group.)
Answering an Waiting Call
●
●
You will receive warning tone in handset.
Hang up the present call to take a new one.
1
● IP KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM / SLT User Guide iPECS-50/100/300/600/1200
SLT User Guide for iPECS System
Establishing a Conference
The system allows you to set up a 3-way conference.
● Lift handset.
● Call the desired party. (outside or internal)
● Press hook switch.
● Dial the internal extension number.
● When the other party answers, press hook switch
twice in 2 seconds.
(All three parties are now connected.)
For Follow Me call forward
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Message Waiting
●
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial the desired extension number.
No reply from a key station or extension busy tone
from a SLT key station.
Press hook switch.
Dial 5 5 6, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
Hang up.
●
●
Go to the forwarding station and lift handset.
Dial 5 5 4.
Dial 0.
Dial the station number that calls are to be
forwarded.
Dial the authorization code of forwarded station.
(The authorization code should be registered
before "Follow Me" Call Forward can be set.)
Dial the Forward condition.
Dial the destination station, station group .
or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx)
and desired external phone number.
Press the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
Hang up.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 5 3.
Place the handset.
Call Forward
●
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 5 4.
Dial the desired call forward number.
1 - Unconditional,
2 - Busy calls
3 - No answer calls, 4 - Busy/no answer calls
5 - Incoming outside line to off-net (ATD only)
6 - Off-net Unconditional (SLT only)
7 - Off-net Busy calls (SLT only)
8 - Off-net No answer calls (SLT only)
9 - Off-net Busy/no answer calls (SLT only)
# - Cancel previous forward
Dial the station number to forward incoming calls to.
iPECS-50 : 100~149 / 620~659
iPECS-100 : 100~169 / 620~659
iPECS-300 : 100~399 / 620~667
iPECS-600 : 1000~1599 / 620~667
iPECS-1200: 1000~2199 / 401~500
Hang up.
To cancel Call Forward, lift handset and dial 5 5 4
and #.
To cancel Do Not Disturb,
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 5 9.
Hang up.
Broker Call
●
●
●
●
●
An extension user engaged in an internal or
external call, should briefly press hook switch to
hold a call.
The holding party hears music on hold. (If equipped)
Dial the second number of another internal or
external call.
When the second call is connected, the extension
user may alternate the call between holding
parties by pressing hook switch.
Then, you may make a conference by pressing
hook switch twice in 2 seconds.
Universal Night Answer
When hearing an incoming signal on other phone or
night bell,
● Lift handset.
● Dial UNA Access Code 5 6 7.
● You will be connected to an incoming call if it was
programmed as an UNA line.
Returning Call to Host System
If your iPECS system is connected to another system, you
can use this feature to transfer a call back to an
extension on the other system.
(Your installer will tell you need the feature.)
● While connected to an extension call, press
hook switch.
● Dial 5 5 1, Flash Command To CO Line Code.
● Hearing new dial tone from the other system, dial
the extension number on the required system.
● When the station answers, (See Screened Transfer)
speak or hang up (See Unscreened Transfer) to
transfer the call.
2
● IP KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM / SLT User Guide iPECS-50/100/300/600/1200
SLT User Guide for iPECS System
Paging
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial the desired page zone number.
Give your message.
Hang up to complete paging.
Page Zones
Call all zones
:549
Call all internal zones : 5 4 3
Internal zone 1~ 10 : 5 0 1~ 5 1 0 (iPECS-50/100)
Internal zone 1~ 35 : 5 0 1~ 5 3 5 (iPECS-300/600)
Internal zone 1~ 100 : 3 0 1~ 4 0 0 (iPECS-1200)
External zone 1
: 5 4 5 (iPECS-50)
External zone 1 ~ 2 : 5 4 5 ~ 5 4 6
(iPECS-100/300/600/1200)
Call all external zones : 5 4 8
Meet Me Paging
When hearing a paging announcement,
● Dial 5 4 4.
Queuing
If you access a busy line, you may request the system
to place you on hold, until the next line becomes idle.
● Lift handset.
● Press hook switch.
● Dial 5 5 6, the Callback feature code.
● You will hear confirmation tone when the call is
accepted.
● Hang up.
Call Park
While connected to an outside call,
● Lift handset.
● Press hook switch.
● Dial parking location.
iPECS-50/100 : 601~610
iPECS-300
: 601~619
iPECS-600
: #601~#699
iPECS-1200 : #601~#800
● Hang up.
● To retrieve a parked call, dial parking location.
Pre-selected Messages
You can choose a pre-selected message to be displayed
on the LCD of the phone calling your station.
● Lift handset.
● Dial 5 6 1, the SLT Programming code.
● Dial 5 1, the Display Message code.
● Dial the following number to leave your message.
(00~20)
Dial 00 : User Custom Message
Dial 01 + (Time) LUNCH, RETURN HH:MM
Dial 02 + (Date) ON VACATION, RETURN AT DATE MM:DD
Dial 03 + (Time) OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME HH:MM
Dial 04 + (Date) OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT DATE MM:DD
Dial 05
OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN
Dial 06 + (External no.) CALL XX.... (17 digits)
Dial 07 + (Extension you can be called) IN OFFICE, STA XXXX
Dial 08 + (Time) IN A MEETING, RETURN AT TIME HH:MM
Dial 09
AT HOME
Dial 10
AT BRANCH OFFICE
●
●
●
Press hook switch.
Hang up.
To erase a pre-selected message, lift handset and
dial 5 5 9.
Voice Announcement
Date & Time Prompt;
● Lift handset.
● Dial 6 6 1(iPECS-50/100) or * 6 6 1(other System).
You'll hear time prompt,
"Date is July, 20th. & Time is 00:00."
Station Number Prompt;
Lift handset.
● Dial 6 6 2(iPECS-50/100) or * 6 6 2(other System).
You'll hear station number prompt,
"This is station XXXX.”
●
Station Setting Prompt;
Lift handset.
● Dial 6 6 3(iPECS-50/100) or * 6 6 3(other System).
You'll hear station status prompt like below item,
Station number
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Station ICM Mode Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Listed message x (the number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do not disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP xx
Locked (temporary COS change)
COS x
●
Recording Your Message;
Lift handset.
● Dial Voice Mail group number.
● Dial the station number and authorization code.
● Press ‘8’, for Mailbox settings.
● Press ‘1’, for Edit Greeting.
● Press ‘7’, for Recording Greeting Message.
● Record your message.
● Place the handset.
●
Playing Back Your Message;
Lift handset.
● Dial Voice Mail group number.
● Dial the station number and authorization code.
● Press ‘8’, for Mailbox settings.
● Press ‘1’, for Edit Greeting.
● Press ‘5’, for Listening Greeting Message.
(Your recorded message is heard.)
●
Deleting Your Message;
● Lift handset.
● Dial Voice Mail group number.
● Dial the station number and authorization code.
● Press ‘8’, for Mailbox settings.
● Press ‘1’, for Edit Greeting.
● Press ‘7’, for Recording Greeting Message.
● Hang up immediately.
(Your message has now been deleted.)
3
● IP KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM / SLT User Guide iPECS-50/100/300/600/1200
SLT User Guide for iPECS System
To activate Call Forward to Voice Mail Group,
● Lift handset.
● Dial 5 5 4.
● Dial Call Forward type number (1~4)
● Dial Voice Mail Group Number.
● Hang up.
To deactivate Call Forward to VMIB,
Lift handset.
● Dial 5 5 4.
● Dial # .
● Hang up.
●
To hear the recorded voice Message,
Lift handset.
● Dial the Voice Mail Group
to receive the “Mailbox & Password” prompt.
● Dial the station number and authorization code
to receive the “Number of Messages” prompt.
● Dial ‘1’, for hearing voice message.
● To hear current voice message again, dial 1.
● To save current voice message and hear next
message, dial 2.
● To delete current voice message, dial 3.
● To forward current voice message, dial 4.
● To call sender of voice message, dial 5.
● To skip current voice message
and hear next message, dial 6.
● To add preamble memo on voice message, dial 7.
●
Programming Authorization Code
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 6 1, the SLT Programming code.
Dial 3 3, the Station User Program code.
Dial Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits) .
Momentarily press the Hook-switch
receive confirmation tone
Following features are only available with iPECS
Hotel S/W.
Baby Listening
This feature allows a guest to monitor his room from any
other party of the hotel. You can hear the room which is
set baby listening but the room will not be disturbed.
To activate baby listening at guest’s room,
● Lift the handset.
● Dial the guest’s own room number.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To cancel baby listening at guest’s room,
Replace the handset.
●
To operate baby listening from any other phone in the
system,
● Lift the handset.
● Dial the guest’s own room number.
● DND tone will be heard and dial the guest’s own room
number again.
● After confirmation tone, baby listening is operated.
Maid Status
The Maid can update the maid status of any room.
To register “Cleaned” at a guest station,
● Dial SLT PGM code.
● Dial 6 4.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
To register “Dirty” at a guest station,
Dial SLT PGM code.
● Dial 6 5.
(Confirmation tone is heard.)
●
Programming Your Name
●
●
●
●
●
Lift handset.
Dial 5 6 1, the SLT Programming code.
Dial 7 4, the SLT Name Program Code.
Enter name, refer Alphanumeric Chart.
Momentarily press the Hook-switch
receive confirmation tone
Entering an Account Code
To identify a call, system provides the user with an
account code field in the Call Logging printout by
entering an account code while on an outside call.
After dialing or during a conversation with an
external party,
● Press hook switch.
● Dial 550 and account code.
(An account code can be up to 12 digits.)
● Press ‘*’.
● Continue conversation and hang up to finish the
call.
Handset Off-hook Alarm
Should the handset be left off the cradle unattended,
for any length of time, the user will receive a high
pitched signal.
● To cancel the signal, hang up.
4
LIP-8050V
User Guide
LIP-8050V User Guide
Revision History
Issue
1.0
1.1
1.2
Date
July 09
July 10
Oct. 10
Remark
Initial Release
Change New CI (LG-Ericsson)
Updated Web and contents
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product, it means the product is covered
by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be
disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream
via designated collection facilities appointed by
government or the local authorities.
The correct disposal of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the
environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your
old appliance, please contact your city office, waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
Copyright© 2010 LG-Ericsson Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co. Ltd. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure
of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. LGEricsson reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice. The
information furnished by LG-Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not
warranted to be true in all cases. LG-Ericsson and iPECS are trademarks of LG-Ericsson Co. Ltd. All
other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
LIP-8050V User Guide
Important Safety Information
To prevent unexpected danger or damage please read this information before installing or attempting
to repair you phone. Warning and Caution information is provided to alert the consumer of known
dangers:
Warning: To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not expose your phone to high
humidity areas, such as a bathroom, swimming area, etc.
Caution: Use only LG-Ericsson approved batteries and desktop chargers to avoid the
damage to the phone. Using other batteries or chargers voids your warranty and may cause
an explosion.
1. Only trained and qualified service personnel
shall install, replace or service the phone.
2. Do not spill liquid life water on the phone. If
so, call the service center as this may result in
fire or electric shock.
3. If you see smoke or smell something during
use, unplug the power cord and the phone
line. Call the service center immediately.
4. If the power adapter is used, do not touch
the plug with wet hands. This may result in a
fire or an electric shock or equipment damage.
6. Do not use the phone during a
thunderstorm. Lightning strike may result in
fire, severe electrical or acoustic shock.
7. Do not use the power adapter if the power
cord or wall outlet is damaged. This may result
in fire or an electric shock.
1. Ensure that children do not pull on phone
cords. This may injure children or result in
equipment damage.
2. The ear-piece houses a magnetic device
which may attract pins or small metal objects.
Keep headset clear of such objects and check
before use.
3. Avoid placing the phone in an area that is
excessively dusty, damp or subject to
vibration.
4. Choose a site for the phone that is wellventilated and dry.
5. Do not plug multiple plug-packs into one
power outlet. This may result in the plug
overheating and may result in a fire or plug
pack failure.
6. Do not put heavy things on the phone.
7. Do not drop or throw the phone.
8. Static electricity discharge will damage
electronic components.
9. Keep out of direct sunlight and away from
heat.
10. No user-serviceable parts inside. Do not
insert a screwdriver or any metal objects into
the phone. This may cause electric shock or
damage the equipment and will render the
warranty void.
11. Clean the phone with a soft, dry cloth only.
Do not use volatile liquids such as petrol,
alcohol, or acetone as this may cause a fire or
result in discoloration or damage to plastics.
Do not clean with wax or silicon products as
these may enter the equipment and cause
operation to become unstable.
LIP-8050V User Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.
General.................................................................................................................. 1
Feature Information ............................................................................................... 1
Feature Groupings................................................................................................. 1
iPECS LIP-8050V Phone Description .................................................................... 2
LIP-8050V Phone Installation ................................................................................ 4
1.5.1 Power ......................................................................................................... 4
1.5.2 Wall Mount ................................................................................................. 5
LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ....................................................6
2.1 Using the LCD ....................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Display Menu......................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Preference.................................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Contacts ..................................................................................................... 8
2.2.3 SMS Short Message Service.................................................................... 12
2.2.4 Organizer ................................................................................................. 15
2.2.5 Tools ........................................................................................................ 18
2.2.6 Sound....................................................................................................... 25
2.2.7 Display ..................................................................................................... 26
2.2.8 Settings .................................................................................................... 28
3.
LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES ..................................................35
3.1 Using the Speakerphone ..................................................................................... 35
3.2 Using a Serial DSS .............................................................................................. 35
4. RECEIVING CALLS .............................................................................................37
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Answering a Call While Idle ................................................................................. 37
Responding to a Call While Busy ........................................................................ 38
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME) ....................................................... 38
Differential Ring Signals ...................................................................................... 39
Answering Calls at Night...................................................................................... 40
Answering Calls to Other Stations ....................................................................... 40
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls ......................................... 41
Forwarding Calls.................................................................................................. 41
4.8.1 Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail .................................... 41
4.8.2 Forwarding callers to a Text Message...................................................... 44
5. PLACING A CALL ...............................................................................................46
5.1 Internal Calls........................................................................................................ 46
i
LIP-8050V User Guide
5.1.1 Using Camp-On when calling a busy station ............................................ 46
5.1.2 Leaving a Message Wait .......................................................................... 47
5.2 External Calls ...................................................................................................... 47
5.2.1 Placing external CO/VoIP calls................................................................. 47
5.2.2 Waiting for the next available CO/IP line .................................................. 48
5.2.3 Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing.................................... 49
5.2.4 Disable dialing from your phone ............................................................... 49
5.2.5 Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone ................................. 50
5.3 Using Automated Dialing ..................................................................................... 50
5.3.1 Using Last Number Redial (LNR) ............................................................. 50
5.3.2 Using and Entering Saved Number Dial ................................................... 51
5.3.3 Using System Speed Dial Numbers ......................................................... 51
5.3.4 Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers..................................... 52
5.3.5 Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name ......................................... 53
5.3.6 Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)...................................... 55
6. PLACING A CALL ...............................................................................................56
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different destination ........................................ 56
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state ........................................................... 56
Broker Call: Switching between two calls ............................................................ 57
Joining Multiple People in a Conference.............................................................. 57
6.4.1 Setting up a Conference Room ................................................................ 58
6.5 Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page ............................................................ 59
6.6 Two-Way Record: Recording a call ..................................................................... 59
7. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES ...........................................................................60
7.1 Responding to a Station Message Waiting Indication.......................................... 60
7.2 Getting Voice Mail Messages .............................................................................. 61
8. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS .................................................................................62
8.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .................................................................. 62
8.2 Mobile Phone Extension ...................................................................................... 62
9. MISC. FEATURES...............................................................................................64
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Call Log ............................................................................................................... 64
Background Music and Music on Hold ................................................................ 65
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging ..................................................... 65
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page.................................................................................... 66
Alarm/Door Bell ................................................................................................... 67
Power Fail Transfer (PFT) ................................................................................... 67
System Voice Memo............................................................................................ 67
10. PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES ...................................................................69
ii
LIP-8050V User Guide
10.1 Access PBX or Centrex features ......................................................................... 69
10.2 Access the ISDN Network ................................................................................... 69
10.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features................................... 69
10.2.2 Using ISDN Supplementary Services....................................................... 70
10.2.3 Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction ....................................................... 70
11. FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS .............................................................................71
11.1 Entering Station Program Data............................................................................ 71
11.2 Assigning Features to Flex Buttons ..................................................................... 71
APPENDIX A FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ...............................................................72
APPENDIX B USER PROGRAM CODES ......................................................................74
iii
LIP-8050V User Guide
1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
General
Your telephone is connected to an advanced-technology, highlyversatile, fully-featured telecom system designed to make office
communications easy and productive. Employing state-of-theart Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology, voice and
data converge on a single IP packet network. Because each
iPECS Phone is an IP appliance, it can be moved easily
throughout the office LAN and maintain normal operation.
1.2
Feature Information
We have taken every effort to make this user guide simple and
straightforward. The guide starts with a discussion of the
Display and the Display Menu then moves to the simpler
operations of the iPECS Phone Speakerphone, on to receiving
and placing calls, and then to more advanced features. Each
section includes a brief and basic description of each feature
and step-by-step operation instructions.
The operations shown in this guide use the System’s base
default Numbering Plan. Your specific Numbering Plan may be
different. Some features may not be available for you to access
or may be subject to certain limitations based on the set-up of
the System (refer to your System Administrator, or the iPECS
Technical Manuals for further information).
NOTE - Under certain operating conditions, this equipment
may not be able to make emergency calls. Alternative
arrangements should be made for access to emergency
services.
1.3
Feature Groupings
Every effort has been taken to divide the features into a logical
and consistent sequence so that features can be quickly located.
Features have been divided into groups, Receiving Calls,
Placing Calls, etc. Within each group, features are arranged
according to the difficulty of operation and frequency of use.
LIP-8050V User Guide
1.4
iPECS LIP-8050V Phone Description
The iPECS LIP-8050DV Phone incorporates the latest in VoIP
technology and user interface to provide you with a cost
effective, simple to use, productive communications tool. It
includes a 4.3” (480 x 272 - pixel) color graphic LCD, refer to
Phone Diagrams which follow. The bottom line of the LCD
incorporates an interactive menu accessed with the 3 Soft
buttons just below the display. The Navigation button in the
lower center of the Phone allows you to move through the menu
choices when more than three selections are available.
Features and functions of your iPECS are accessed either using
the Fixed or Flexible buttons or by selecting a menu item using
the Soft buttons. In the remainder of this User Guide, the Fixed
or Flexible buttons are shown with a box surrounding the
BUTTON designation while Soft button menu selections are
shown with a double underline. When additional Soft buttons
are available, use the navigation buttons to display the additional
items.
LIP-8050V User Guide
1
Handset
11
LCD Display
2
Navigation Button
12
Flexible button
3
Speaker
13
Soft button
4
Phone book button
14
Call History button
5
DND button
15
Trans / PGM button
6
Call Back button
16
Speed button
7
Volume up button
17
Hold/Save button
8
Volume down button
18
Speaker button
9
Camera
19
Microphone
10
Ring/MWI LED
iPECS LIP-8050V Diagram
LIP-8050V User Guide
1.5
LIP-8050V Phone Installation
The phone handset is attached as shown (A). The LIP-8050V
has two RJ-45 and 10/100 Base-T LAN connection ports. One
port is for connecting to the LAN (D), and the other can be
connected to a desktop data device or PC (B).
iPECS LIP-8050V Connections
1.5.1
Power
All LIP-8000 series phones can be powered by the AC/DC
Adapter-K- (48 VDC @ 0.3A; shown as “C” in the previous
graphic) or over the LAN cable using the POE8 or other 802.3af
compliant switch.
If using the AC/DC Adapter, after connecting the Phone to the
LAN, the Adapter’s DC voltage plug is inserted into the powerinput jack on the underside of the Phone. One end of the AC
power cord is inserted into the mating receptacle of the AC
Adapter, and the other end is inserted into the AC power outlet.
NOTE—LIP-8000 series consoles are powered through the flat
cable used to connect the console to the IP phone. Up to
2(without LIP-8048DSS) or 4(with LIP-8048DSS) consoles
can be chain-link connected to the phone.
DSS Connection to IP Phone
LIP-8050V User Guide
1.5.2
Wall Mount
The LIP-8000 series phones can be wall mounted as needed.
The following instructions describe how to perform a wall mount
installation. For more detailed instruction, refer to the iPECS
Hardware Description and Installation Manual.




Mark and drill two (2) 7mm holes for plastic wall
anchors.
Insert the two (2) anchors into the holes and insert and
tighten the each screw leaving about 2.5 mm (1/8-inch)
of the screw exposed.
Slide the LIP-8000 phone over the screws and assure
the phone is secure. It may be necessary to remove the
phone and tighten or loosen the screws for a secure
mounting.
Remove the Handset hook from the phone as shown in
the figure below. Reverse the hook and re-install in the
LIP-8000 phone so that the hook catches the groove in
the handset receiver.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2. LCD & the Display
Menu
2.2
2. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES
2.1
Using the LCD
The iPECS LIP-8050V has a 4.3” (480 x 272 pixel) color graphic
LCD which is divided into 3 sections. The upper section
consists of a line to display various icons, date, time and station
number display.
The middle section includes designations for the five Flexible
buttons and information on the active call (called/calling party Id,
feature status, etc.
The lower section, which consists of a single line, is an
interactive menu to guide you through feature access, User
Program selections, and the Display Menu discussed below.
Display Menu
The MENU button accesses the Display Menu.
Use the Navigation button to highlight an item.
Use the center Navigation button to select the item.
When inputting a character string use the DND button to delete
a character.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.1
Preference
You can configure the Call Preference menu and flexible button
label.
2.2.1.1 Call preference
You can configure the call preference items.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.1.2 Flexible button label
You can set the label (name) for each flexible button. If the label
is not set then the feature name displays.
2.2.2
Contacts
You can configure call history and phone book in the contacts
menu.
2.2.2.1 Phonebook
You can access the Phonebook menu from the Display Menu or,
while idle, with the left navigation button. In the Phone Book,
you can search and call contacts by the name.
LIP-8050V User Guide
Press the CALL button, to call the Main number (in yellow) or
MENU to select a different number available for the contact
(Mobile/Home/Office/Station).
To add or edit a contact record in the Phonebook, select Add
from the Phonebook menu or Edit from the Search menu.
LIP-8050V User Guide
You can enter various telephone numbers, identify the Main
number and select the CO line for calling the contact. use LIST
for available CO codes.
Scroll down; you can assign a ring tone and photo image that
displays if the incoming Call ID matches an assigned contact.
You can assign the CO line to use when calling a contact
number.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.2.2 Call History
You can go to the Call History from the Display Menu or, while
idle, with the right navigation button.
The Call History includes several call categories, incoming calls,
outgoing calls, missed calls and all calls. The display indicates
time and date for the call as well as any photo assigned and the
duration of the call.
You can scroll and call a record from selected in the Call History.
Records are sorted by category and time, most recent first.
From the MENU button pop-up you can add a record from the
Call History to the Phonebook, and delete a call or all Call
History records.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.3
SMS Short Message Service
You can send SMS messages to internal stations or, with SMS
service, over the public network.
2.2.3.1 New SMS
You can enter and send an SMS message using edit box.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To edit new message:
Enter your message in the test box and check the box for
recipients you desire and select SEND.
2.2.3.2 Received SMS
You can check and view your received messages.
The navigation button is used to move message. If you press
OK button then you can view the message in detail.
Select the highlighted message for the message time and
number stamp.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.3.3 Send SMS
You can check and view sent messages.
Select the highlighted message to view the recipient list and
time stamp.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.3.4 Delete SMS
You can delete the Received, Sent or all messages.
2.2.4
Organizer
You can set the alarm clock and organize your schedule.
2.2.4.1 Alarm
You can configure the local phone Alarm Clock with up to ten
(10) different alarm times.
LIP-8050V User Guide
For each alarm, set the condition as once or repeated daily, the
time, the alarm notification interval, the Ring tone group and ring
tone for notification. If you lift the handset the alarm notification
will cease.
2.2.4.2 Schedule
You can configure your schedule from the Organizer menu to
notify you of a scheduled event.
You can assign up to 30 event schedules. If you press the ADD
button the new schedule screen appears. The event date and
time is set along with a name and ring tone group and tone for
notification.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To show saved schedules use the MENU pop-up to see the list of
all or today’s schedules.
Today’s scheduled events are displayed in yellow.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.5
Tools
You can record and play video and audio files and also copy
from/to USB memory.
2.2.5.1 Camera
You can take pictures and configure it in the photo album. You
can record video and configure it in the video album.
Take photo
You can adjust resolution using the navigation button before you
Capture a picture. Supported Resolution are: 120 x 90 320 x
240 352 x 288 480 x 272 640 x 480
LIP-8050V User Guide
Record video
You can adjust resolution using the navigation button before you
Record a video. Supported resolutions are: 176 x 144 352 x
288
Image gallery
You can manage photo files. There are three categories Basic
Images (photos stored in the phone at the factory), Taken
Images (photos captured by you) and Received Images.
LIP-8050V User Guide
Select a category to display the list of images and a thumb nail
of the highlighted image. The highlighted can be stored as the
background screen for the phone.
Video album
You can manage video files. There are two categories,
Recorded Videos and Received Videos.
Select a category to display the list of videos and a thumb nail of
the highlighted video.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.5.2 Audio
You can record and play audio files.
To record sound, select 1. Record Audio then select record to
record your audio.
In the Audio Gallery, you can view and manage your recorded
audio files.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.5.3 Internal memory
You can review the internal memory status.
2.2.5.4 External memory
You can review the external memory status and copy some files
from/to USB memory.
External memory
You can review the external memory status.
LIP-8050V User Guide
Copy from USB
You can copy files from USB memory card that you connect to
the back of the phone.
You can copy image (photo) files from USB.
The supported formats are jpg and png.
1.
2.
Please do not remove USB while in use.
If image size is over 200 Kbyte then it could not copy.
You can copy audio files from USB.
Support formats are MP3, AMR and WAV (CCITT u-law 8,000
kHz, 8bit, mono).
LIP-8050V User Guide
You can copy video files from USB.
Support formats are MP4 and 3GP.
Copy to USB
You can copy files to the USB memory card that you connect to
the back of the phone.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.6
Sound
You can assign tone for intercom ring and CO ring as well as the
alert tone for received SMS messages.
2.2.6.1 ICM-CO Ring
You can assign ICM and CO ring type. The sound files
available are divided into four categories. These include basic
audio (MP3), main ring (wav), received audio and system ring
files. If you select system ring then the designated ring that is
assigned in the system will be used.
The basic and main ring will be provided by default.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.6.2 SMS Alert sound
You can assign SMS alert tone, the selected tone is played
when new SMS message is received.
2.2.7
Display
You can assign a picture for background image or video
substitute image. You can also configure characteristics off the
LCD.
2.2.7.1 Background image
You can select a picture for background image from one of three
categories, Basic Images, Taken Photos or Received Images.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.7.2 Brightness
You can adjust the LCD brightness.
2.2.7.3 Substitute image
You can select a picture for the video substitute image from one
of three categories, Substitute images, Taken photos and
Received images.
2.2.7.4 Window color
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.7.5 Font
2.2.7.6 Language
2.2.8
Settings
From the Settings menu you can manage the Phone settings,
configure network and initialize the LIP-8050.
LIP-8050V User Guide
2.2.8.1 Phone Management
Under Phone management you can assign a station name,
password, station number and maximum video frame rate.
To register name:
To change password:
LIP-8050V User Guide
You can request a station number:
You can assign the maximum video frame rate.
2.2.8.2 Network Configuration
You can review and set some items related to your LAN and
VLAN.
LIP-8050V User Guide
LAN information
You can review the network mode (static or DHCP), IP address,
Subnet mask, Default gateway, DNS address, MAC address.
LAN Configuration
You can set the network mode (static or DHCP), IP address,
Subnet mask, Default gateway and primary and secondary DNS
address.
VLAN Configuration
You can set the VLAN ID and priority for both LAN port and PC
port of the phone.
LIP-8050V User Guide
DIFFSERV Configuration
You can set the DiffServ value for voice, signals and video.
Check network
You can ping and trace the route to an IP address.
Ping
LIP-8050V User Guide
Trace route
2.2.8.3 System Configuration
You can set the system IP address and connection mode (Local
/ Local-Remote / Remote).
2.2.8.4 Initialization
You can initialize some configuration and restart phone itself.
LIP-8050V User Guide
Set to default
You can initialize the Call History, PhoneBook, Multimedia data,
Alarm clock and schedule and configuration Settings.
Reboot
You can restart phone from the Reboot menu.
LIP-8050V User Guide
3. LCD, Speakerphone
& Related Features
3. LCD, SPEAKERPHONE & RELATED FEATURES
3.1
Using the Speakerphone
Activate the iPECS Speakerphone at any time (except for
Paging) in place of lifting the handset to receive or place calls.
Additionally, you may switch between the handset and
Speakerphone during a call. By keeping the handset Off-hook,
the Group Listen feature is activated, which provides incoming
audio over the speaker with outgoing audio from the handset.
This permits a local ‘group’ to listen to both sides of the
conversation without interfering with the conversation.
While in a conversation using the Speakerphone, Mute the
microphone using the MUTE button. When Mute is active, the
display selection changes to SPEAK. To turn the microphone on,
press the SPEAK soft button.
With Auto Speaker Select, activating or accessing a feature by
pressing its button will activate the Speakerphone automatically.
When using a Headset, the SPEAKER button controls the
ON/OFF-hook state for the phone.
To use the Speakerphone to answer or place a call:
 Press SPEAKER , the phone goes off-hook and sends audio to
the speaker and the microphone.
To control the volume of the Speakerphone or handset:
 Press the VOL▲ VOL▼ button.
3.2
Using a Serial DSS
The LIP-8012DSS, LIP-8012LSS, and LIP-8048DSS can be
connected with the LIP-8050V using the RS-232 cable. Be sure
to verify the serial DSS and LSS capacities with the iPECS
System to ensure usability (refer to iPECS Manual). The
following graphics show the front and rear view of each.
NOTE—A Linked Pair slave station cannot use a serial DSS.
LIP-8050V User Guide
LIP-8012LDSS
LIP-8012DSS
LIP-8048DSS
LIP-8050V User Guide
4. Receiving Calls
4. RECEIVING CALLS
4.1
Answering a Call While Idle
There are 3 basic types of incoming calls; internal/external
ringing calls, Intercom Voice Announce calls, and Hold recalls.
Your phone may be assigned Ringing Line Preference; in this
case, calls that ring are answered by lifting the handset.
Otherwise, you must press the flashing Flex button.
External calls to an iPECS Phone will appear under the CO/IP
line or a LOOP button.
External calls are from CO lines or VoIP channels that are
programmed to ring at your phone. For external calls, Delay
Ring may be assigned allowing others to answer the call before
the call rings at your phone.
Calls can be forwarded in some manner from another user; if
providing call coverage for other users, you may also receive
Station Call Coverage calls.
Calls placed on Hold, including Transfers, parked calls, etc. will
recall if left on hold for too long.
ICM Voice Announce calls are answered based on the ICM
Signaling mode at the receiving phone; in Hands-free (HF)
mode, after the splash tone and announcement, speak normally
into the microphone. In the Privacy (PV) mode, lift the handset
to respond. The ICM Signaling mode can be assigned in
Station Programming.
The LCD will display the calling number or, if available, the
name of the station or CO/VoIP line, CO Line Name Display.
To answer a call ringing at your phone:
 Lift the handset or press the flashing Flex button (as needed),
the call will be connected.
To respond to an Intercom Voice Announce call:
 In HF mode, simply speak as normal into the microphone,
OR
 In PV mode, lift the handset to respond.
LIP-8050V User Guide
4.2
Responding to a Call While Busy
While you are busy on another call, you may receive a Muted
Ring, Camp-On tone, or Voice-Over announcement. Muted
Ring is provided over the speaker of your Phone indicating a
Call Waiting. You also may receive Camp On tones, a burst of
tone on top of the existing call, as an indication of another call
waiting.
While busy, certain stations can activate Voice-Over to your
phone. In this case, audio is received from both the active call
and the Voice-Over announcement at the same time.
Respond to any of these Off-hook Signals in one of several
ways; place the existing call on Hold and respond to the new
incoming call, activate One-time DND, send a Silent Text
Message, or ignore the new call.
Silent Text Message requires a TEXT MESSAGE button (not
available on a SLT or other non-display terminal).
The Attendant or Secretary may use Intrusion to announce a
call while you are busy.
To answer a Call Waiting:
 Press HOLD/SAVE, and/or
 Press the flashing CO/IP LINE button.
To activate One-time DND:
 Press the DND button.
To send a Silent Text Message:
 Press the programmed TEXT MESSAGE button,
 Select the desired message to send.
4.3
Using Answering Machine Emulation (AME)
When a call is connected to your voice mail, you can screen the
call as if using a normal Answering Machine. The caller’s voice
is played over your speaker while the message is being
recorded. There are two methods of notification and call
screening provided, Ring or Speaker mode.
Ring mode—the Answering Machine Emulation (AME) Flex
button will flash to notify you of a call. You may press the Flex
button to hear the caller as the voice message is stored.
Speaker mode—when the call is sent to the voice mailbox, the
caller’s voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of your
iPECS Phone.
LIP-8050V User Guide
You may terminate screening, leaving the caller in voice mail to
record a message, talk with the caller and record the
conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and disconnect
the Voicemail. The AME feature is only available when using
the iPECS VMIM/VSF Voice Mail; a MUTE and AME button
should be programmed (refer to Appendix A User Program
Codes).
To screen a call in Ring mode:
 Press the flashing AME button, the caller’s voice is broadcast
over the station speaker and stored in the voice mailbox (in the
Speaker mode, broadcast is automatic).
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail:
 Press the illuminated SPEAKER button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail:
 Press the MUTE button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message recording:
 Press the illuminated AME button, the caller is connected and
the Voice Mail disconnected.
4.4
Differential Ring Signals
When multiple phones in a small area ring, it can be difficult to
tell which are ringing. With the LIP-8050V, 12 ring tones are
available for differentiating one phone’s ringing from another.
These tones are stored on the phone’s permanent memory.
To select a Ring Tone from phone memory:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 1 for Ring Tones,
 Dial 1 or 2 for Internal or External ring,
 Dial 01-12 for the desired tone number; a confirmation tone is
heard,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to make the selection.
To select a Ring Tone from the Main Menu:
Select Sounds,
Select ICM/CO Ring
For each ring select a Ring Tone.
LIP-8050V User Guide
4.5
Answering Calls at Night
In the Night mode, Loud Bell Control may be used to send ring
signals to external bells. You may answer these calls with
Universal Night Answer (UNA).
To answer a call ringing during night mode:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 567 (UNA code).
4.6
Answering Calls to Other Stations
When nearby stations are ringing, you may pick-up (answer) the
call. Select to answer a call ringing at a specific station
(Directed Call Pick-Up) or you may choose to answer the
oldest call ringing to your station group (Group Call Pick-Up).
Assign a Flex button with the Group Call Pick-Up code (566) for
one-touch access.
NOTE—Pick-Up will not answer calls on the ringing station
Private Line unless the line appears on your phone.
To answer a call ringing at another station:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 7 (Directed Call Pick-Up code),
 Dial the Intercom Number of the ringing station; the call will be
connected.
To answer a call ringing at a station in your group:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 566 (Group Call Pick-Up code), the call is connected.
LIP-8050V User Guide
4.7
Using Do-Not-Disturb (DND) to Block Incoming Calls
Activate Do-Not-Disturb when you wish not to be interrupted by
pressing the DND button; the phone will block incoming calls.
Internal callers will receive a fast busy tone and the display will
show the DND status. Activate Do-Not-Disturb while busy (OneTime DND); DND will be active for the duration of the present
call. One-Time DND requires using a DND button.
When an Executive activates DND, calls are forwarded to the
paired Secretary automatically.
The Attendants and Secretary may be able to activate DND
Override and Intrude on an active call. The Attendants may
also cancel DND at other stations.
To toggle DND ON and OFF:
 Press the DND button.
4.8
Forwarding Calls
4.8.1
Forwarding calls to another Station or Voice Mail
Incoming calls may be diverted to other resources of the system.
Resources include other stations, VMIM/VSF Voice Mail,
External Voice Mail and external number (speed).
Call Forward can be activated or deactivated from your phone or
from a different station (Call Forward, Remote).
You may define the conditions or ‘type of forward’ as below:
1: Unconditional—all calls to the station, except recalls, are
forwarded.
2: Busy—Immediately forwards all calls, except recalls, when
the station is busy.
3: No Answer—forwards all calls to the station, except recalls,
when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer.
4: Busy/No Answer—forwards calls if the station is busy or
does not answer within the No Answer timer.
When you forward calls from a different station, you may need to
enter your Authorization Code.
Calls on a Private Line will not forward except to a station with
an appearance of the Private Line or to Voice Mail.
Press the Forward button.
LIP-8050V User Guide
Highlight the Forward type desired and select OK.
Select forward destination. (Station, VM(VSF) group, Hunt group
or Speed Dial number.
LIP-8050V User Guide
The forward status will be updated on your LCD.
When you forward calls from a different station or a remote
location, you may need to enter your Authorization Code. In
addition, from a remote location, you must access the system
through a DISA enabled CO line.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
 Lift the handset,
 Press FWD or dial 554,
 Dial the Remote Call Forward code 0,
 Dial your Authorization code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 1-4,
 Press SPEED ,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a remote location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line,
 While receiving dial-tone, dial the Call Forward feature code
554,
 Dial your Authorization Code (Station number & Password),
 Dial the ‘type of forward’ code 6-9,
 Dial Speed Dial bin number,
 Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Off Premise (forward to an external
number) from a different phone:
LIP-8050V User Guide
4.8.2
Forwarding callers to a Text Message
Using an iPECS Phone, the system can be setup to return a
‘Text Message’ to internal callers. When calling your Station,
internal callers will automatically receive the selected message
or you can send a text message you select in response to an
internal call, Silent Text Message.
There are 11 Custom Display Messages each up to 24
characters. Ten can be assigned by the Attendant and one
assigned by you, see Station Speed Dial Character entry
chart.
In addition, there are ten fixed Pre-Defined Text Messages;
some allow auxiliary input for time, date, etc. (as shown in
message list).
Message 01:
LUNCH RETURN AT hh:mm
Message 02:
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 03:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 04:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE mm:dd
Message 05:
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06:
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07:
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08:
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09:
AT HOME
Message 10:
AT BRANCH OFFICE
LIP-8050V User Guide
To activate Custom or Pre-Defined Message Forward:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 51,
 Dial the two-digit text Message code (00-20),
 Dial any auxiliary input for messages 01-04 and 06-08,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , forward confirmed.
To cancel activated Message:
 Press the Fwd Soft button,
 Dial #.
To program the Station Custom Message (00) at your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial User Program feature code 52,
 Enter Message contents, up to 24 characters, using the
following Character Entry Chart:
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
W - 91
T - 81
R - 72
X - 92
U - 82
S - 73
Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7*
Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 - 70
9 - 90
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart

Press
HOLD/SAVE ,
to save the message.
LIP-8050V User Guide
5. PLACING A CALL
5. Placing Calls
5.1
Internal Calls
You can place calls to other stations in the system over the
Intercom. The call will ring, or for an ICM Voice Announce call,
a splash tone will be heard. Ring or Voice Announce is normally
determined by settings at the called station but you may change
this by dialing ‘#’ after placing the call. By changing the mode, a
Voice Announce call will ring or a ringing ICM call will allow
Voice Announce (toggle).
You can assign a Flex button for Direct Station Selection/Busy
Lamp Field (DSS/BLF). The DSS/BLF button allows you to call
another station with the single touch of a button. The button
LED will display the other station’s status (ON=busy, OFF=idle).
When you go off-hook, you may connect to another station or
system resource automatically. This Prime Line Preference
may be immediate or delayed allowing you to take other actions
during the delay. Otherwise, you may press another Flex button
before going off-hook to override Prime Line Preference.
If you go off-hook and take no action, Intercom dial-tone will
time-out, and after the Howler tone is received, your phone will
be placed out-of-service in Intercom Lock-Out; you then must
hang-up to return the phone to an idle state.
To place an Intercom call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Intercom number of the desired station,
 When the call is answered or the Splash tone is heard, begin
speaking with the called party.
5.1.1
Using Camp-On when calling a busy station
If the called party is busy, you may activate Camp-On, Callback
or Voice Over at the station. Camp-On allows you to wait offhook for the called station to answer. Callback allows you to
hang-up, and when the busy station returns to an idle state, the
system will call your Station; after you answer the callback, the
system will call the previously busy station.
LIP-8050V User Guide
If you are the Attendant or Secretary, you may activate
Intrusion. You may also use Step Call; dial the next station by
dialing the last digit of the Intercom number.
To Camp-On (wait off-hook) for a busy station:
 Press * and await an answer.
To request a Callback (wait on-hook) for a busy station:
 Press the CALL BACK button and hang-up.
To make a Voice Over announcement to a busy station:
 Dial #,
 After the Splash tone is heard, begin speaking.
5.1.2
Leaving a Message Wait
If the called user does not answer or is in DND mode, you may
leave a Message Wait. The called user will receive a Message
Wait indication; the message icon will be displayed. If the
Ring/Message LED is set to Message Wait, the LED will flash.
To activate Message Waiting:
 When calling a number that is busy or in DND mode, press the
CALL BACK button and hang-up.
5.2
External Calls
Placing external CO/VoIP calls
5.2.1
External calls are placed on CO/IP lines. These ‘lines’ are
accessed either using a button on the iPECS Phone assigned as
a CO/IP line or using dial codes. The CO/IP lines are grouped
for different types of calls, local, long distance, etc. Using the
CO/IP line group code, you will be able to access any line from
the group. A Flex button on the iPECS Phone assigned as a
LOOP button lets you access a line from a group. Dial codes for
access to CO/IP lines are:
Individual CO/IP line access
88 + Line number (01-42 for iPECS-50 & 100, 001-200 for
iPECS-300, 001-400 for iPECS-600, or 001-600 for iPECS1200).
LIP-8050V User Guide
CO/IP Group access—
801-820 for iPECS-50 & 100, 801-872 for iPECS-300 & 600, or
8001-8200 for iPECS-1200.
Any CO/IP Line access—
9
When dialing on a CO line which uses pulse style signals, you
may activate Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover changing to
DTMF style dialing (for banking services, etc.).
When placing an IP call, you must dial an IP address using the
‘*’ key in place of the dot.
If Least Cost Routing is set-up, the number you dial will be
analyzed and the system will place the call on the least
expensive route.
You may be assigned Dialing and/or CO/IP Line Access
Restrictions, in which case you will receive error tone if you
attempt to dial or access a restricted number/CO/IP line. CO/IP
line and Station Class Of Service (COS), which establish
dialing restrictions, may vary during Day and Night operation
(Day/Night COS).
You may need to enter an Authorization code before placing
calls, in which case you will receive a second dial tone.
Your external calls may be subject to Call Time Restrictions,
you will receive a Call Warning Tone prior to disconnect.
NOTE—In the event of an emergency, assigned Emergency
numbers (ex., a 911 call) may be dialed from any station in
the System, regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions
(COS).
To place an external call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number.
5.2.2
Waiting for the next available CO/IP line
If all the lines connected to your system are busy, you will
receive an All Trunks Busy signal. You may request to be
notified when a line is available for use.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To activate a queue if the selected/dialed line is busy:
 Select/dial CO/IP line; when the busy tone is returned, press
the CALL BACK button,
 Return to an idle state by going on-hook; when the line is
available, the Station will be notified with ringing.
5.2.3
Account Codes: Tracking External calls for billing
In some cases, you or your company may desire to track calls
for billing or other purposes. You may enter an Account Code,
which is output from the system to a printer in the SMDR report.
You may have an Account Code Flex button (refer to
Assigning features to Flex buttons).
To enter an Account Code before the call:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *, Intercom dial tone is heard,
 Place the CO/IP call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
 Press the assigned ACCOUNT CODE button,
 Dial the Account Code (1-12 digits),
 Press *.
5.2.4
Disable dialing from your phone
You can temporarily ‘Lock’ your phone by activating Temporary
COS, which will disable all dialing outside calls from the phone.
To deactivate Temporary COS you must enter the station’s
Authorization code.
To activate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 21 (User Program code),
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
LIP-8050V User Guide
To deactivate Temporary COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 22 (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization code,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
5.2.5
Temporarily override dialing restrictions at a phone
Override the dialing restrictions at any phone by activating
Walking COS. The Walking COS dialing restriction levels are
applied for a single call only. For multiple calls, you will need to
reactivate Walking COS or use the Flash Soft button to regain
CO/IP dial-tone.
To activate Walking COS:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial 23 (User Program code),
 Dial your Authorization Code (station number and password),
 Place call as normal.
5.3
Using Automated Dialing
5.3.1
Using Last Number Redial (LNR)
The last number dialed on an external call is automatically saved
in the Last Number Redial (LNR) buffer. The LIP-8050 phone
will display the last 15 numbers.
Press the
SPEED .
Use the Navigation button to highlight the desired number
Press SEND.
LIP-8050V User Guide
User can make call using CALL HISTORY button.
5.3.2
Using and Entering Saved Number Dial
You may store the last number dialed on an external call to the
Saved Number Dial buffer for convenient dialing at a later time.
The Saved number is stored until a new number is saved.
To place a call using Save Number Dial:
 Press SPEED button,
 Dial #.
To store a number in the Save Number Dial:
 While on an outgoing external call, press the SAVE button.
5.3.3
Using System Speed Dial Numbers
The iPECS-100 system has memory allocated for 800 System
Speed Dial numbers (bins 200-999). The iPECS-300 system
has memory allocated for 3000 System Speed Dial numbers
(bins 2000-4999). The iPECS-600 system has memory allocated
for 6000 System Speed Dial numbers (bins 2000-7999). The
iPECS-1200 system has memory allocated for 12000 System
Speed Dial numbers (bins 20000-31999). You may, if allowed,
use System Speed Dial to call frequently dialed numbers.
In some cases, these numbers are divided into groups called
System Speed Zone Groups. In this case, you may access
some numbers and not others and your dialing restrictions may
be invoked.
Only an Attendant can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
To place a call using System Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial the desired System Speed Dial bin number
LIP-8050V User Guide
5.3.4
Using and Entering Station Speed Dial Numbers
Each station in the iPECS-100 System is allocated memory for
20 Station Speed Dial numbers (bins 00-19) each up to 48
digits. The iPECS-300 & 600 &1200 support 100 Station
Speed Dial numbers (bins 000-099). These numbers are
entered at the user’s station and may include several ‘special’
instructions. Special instructions and the corresponding button
are:
PAUSE will momentarily stop dialing.
st
FLASH as 1 digit—Activate dial tone detect.
st
FLASH not as 1 digit—The system will generate a flash on
the CO line.
CALL BACK as 1st digit—Send digits as ISDN Keypad Facility
message.
‘*’ as 1st digit—Display Security, the stored number will not
be displayed when used.
st
‘*’ not as 1 digit—Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover, the
system will switch from pulse to tone dialing.
When entering a Speed Dial, a 16-character name may be
associated with the number for Dial by Name. Characters are
entered with two keystrokes as shown in the following chart.
Q – 11
A - 21
D - 31
Z – 12
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
J - 51
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
W - 91
P - 71
T - 81
X - 92
R - 72
U - 82
Y - 93
S - 73
V - 83
Z - 9#
Q - 7*
8 - 80
9 - 90
7 - 70
*1 Blank
0-00
#
*2 - :
*3 - ,
Character Entry Chart
LIP-8050V User Guide
To place a call using Station Speed Dial:
 Lift the handset,
 Press the SPEED button,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number (00-19 or 000099).
To enter a Station Speed Dial number with CO Line and Name:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the SPEED , button,
 Dial the desired Station Speed Dial bin number,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number to be stored,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 If desired, enter the associated name, see Character Entry
Chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
To assign a Station Speed Dial number directly to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Select the Tel Num,
 Select/dial the CO/IP line/group,
 Dial the desired number,
 Press HOLD/SAVE ,
 If desired, enter the associated name, see Character Entry
chart,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
5.3.5
Using Dial by Name and Entering Your Name
Dial by Name employs three different Directories: Private
directory (Station Speed dial), Public Directory (System Speed
dial), or Intercom directory.
NOTE—To allow others to contact you via the Intercom directory,
you must enter a name for your station (up to 12 characters).
LIP-8050V User Guide
To make call by name, Press SPEED button twice.
Select a type (ICM, Station speed or system speed).
Select a person and press SEND button to place the call.
LIP-8050V User Guide
5.3.6
Using Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR)
When making an external call and a busy signal is received, the
system can be set to retry the number until the call is connected,
the feature is cancelled, or the maximum number of retries is
attempted—this is Automatic Called Number Redial (ACNR).
For each retry, the system will activate your speaker then place
the call with the microphone muted. When the remote end
answers, you must select the MUTE button, or lift the handset.
Either of these actions will cancel the ACNR request as well as
connect you to the remote party.
To set up ACNR, while on an outgoing call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu and select
the ACNR button,
 Hang-up handset.
To cancel the ACNR request:
 Press the Stop button.
LIP-8050V User Guide
6. Call Handling
6. PLACING A CALL
6.1
Call Transfer: Sending a call to a different
destination
You can send an active call to another station or other resource
of the system, Call Transfer. You can screen the transfer with
the receiving party (Screened Call Transfer) or complete the
transfer without screening (Unscreened Call Transfer).
Transferred calls, internal or external, are place in Transfer
Hold. These calls will receive Music on Hold (MOH) and will
recall if not answered in a timely manner.
If an Unscreened Transfer call encounters an error or DND, it
may immediately recall at your Station.
DSS/BLF buttons may be employed to transfer calls.
To Transfer an active call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Call the transfer party,
 Unscreened Call Transfer- Hang-up,
 Screened Call Transfer– When call is answered or Splash tone
is heard, announce the call then hang-up.
6.2
Call Hold: Placing a call in a waiting state
You may place an active Internal or External call in one of
several holding states. In System Hold, other non-restricted
stations may pick-up the call. In Exclusive Hold, only the holding
station may pick-up the call.
The system is assigned a preferred hold type (System or
Exclusive). You may override this Hold Preference by pressing
the HOLD/SAVE button twice.
The LEDs for CO/IP line buttons flash at distinctive rates for the
holding station and other iPECS Phone users.
There are also user operations such as pressing a DSS/BLF
button that will place a call in Automatic Hold.
Calls will remain in the held state for a period and then recall the
user. This Hold Recall is provided with a different ring signal. If
not answered in a timely manner, the Attendant will receive
Attendant Hold Recall.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To place a call on Hold:
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
6.3
Broker Call: Switching between two calls
You may switch between the active call and a call on Hold,
placing the active call on Hold acting as a broker between two or
more parties (Broker Call). iPECS Phone users may ‘broker’
for multiple calls up to the number of CO/IP line buttons.
To switch between two calls (Broker Call):
 Press the desired CO/IP line button.
6.4
Joining Multiple People in a Conference
You can establish a Conference with up to 3 parties, or 24
parties when using a Multi-Party Conference Interface Module
(MCIM). The other parties in the Conference may be internal or
external.
A Conference can be placed on Hold and is subject to Hold
Recall.
You may also use the Conference operation to join 2 external
parties in a private conversation. This is an Unsupervised
Conference, which is not subject to the normal Hold Recall
operation.
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Select the Conf button,
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Select the Conf button,
 Repeat above for additional parties
 Select the Conf button again to establish the conference.
To establish a Conference:
 Establish call with one of the desired conference parties,
 Select the Conf button,
 Establish call with the other conference party,
 Select the Conf button,
 Repeat above for additional parties
 Select the Conf button again to establish the conference.
LIP-8050V User Guide
6.4.1
Setting up a Conference Room
In addition to establishing a Conference, up to 9 Conference
Rooms can be set up, letting up to 24 parties converse when
using a MCIM. When setting up a Conference Room, a
password can be designated for invited parties (internal and
external parties) to use for accessing the established
Conference Room.
To set-up a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 53 to create a Conference Room,
 Dial the desired Conference Room number (1-9),
 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room (up to 12
digits),
 Press HOLD/SAVE to establish the Room.
To join a Conference Room:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial 59 (Conference Room entry code),
 Dial the Conference Room Number,
 Dial the Conference Room password.
To delete a Conference Room:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 54 (Conference Room delete code),
 Dial the Conference Room number (1-9),
 Dial the Conference Room password,
 Press HOLD/SAVE to delete the Conference Room.
LIP-8050V User Guide
6.5
Call Park: Placing a call on Hold to Page
A user may transfer an active CO/IP call to a special holding
location (Park Orbit), which can be accessed easily from any
station in the system. Typically, this feature is used with Paging
to notify the desired user of a parked call.
Parked calls are subject to Hold Recall after the Call Park timer.
To place a Conference on Hold:
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To retrieve the Conference from Hold:
 Select the Conf button.
To establish an Unsupervised Conference:
 Establish conference with external parties,
 Select the Conf button,
 Hang-up the handset.
To retrieve an Unsupervised Conference:
 Lift the handset,
 Select the Conf button.
To park an active external call:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial the Park Orbit (601-610 for iPECS-50 & 100, 601-619 for
iPECS-300, 601-699 for iPECS-600, 6001-6200 for iPECS1200),
 Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the Park Orbit.
6.6
Two-Way Record: Recording a call
You may record an active external conversation in your Voice
Mail Box.
To activate Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next Menu and select
the Record button, record warning tone is heard and recording
starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a CO/IP call:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Record button or,
 Hang-up, return to idle.
LIP-8050V User Guide
7. Send & Retrieve
Messages
7. SEND & RETRIEVE MESSAGES
7.1
Responding to a Station Message Waiting
Indication
Another station can leave an ICM Message Waiting indication
(MWI) when you do not answer or your phone is in DND mode.
The message icon will be displayed on the LCD screen. If
programmed, a flashing MSG LED on the iPECS Phone also will
indicate when there is a Message Waiting. As a further
notification, a Message Wait Reminder Tone can be provided.
You may review and delete messages as well as respond with a
call back.
Press the CALL BACK button.
Select 1. ICM MWI.
Press OK button to return the call.
LIP-8050V User Guide
7.2
Getting Voice Mail Messages
When callers are forwarded or recall to your Voice Mail Box,
they can leave a voice message, as part of the integrated
VMIM/VSF module, the iPECS Feature Server or an external
Voice Mail system.
These Voice Mail systems allow access to and management of
received voice messages. While in your Mail Box, you have
control of your password and Mail Box greeting. In addition, you
can remotely control Call Forward for your station to Voice Mail.
You will need to register an Authorization Code for your station
to access the VMIM/VSF Voice messages.
Press the CALL BACK button.
Select the desired Voice Mail (3, 4, 5)
Follow the Voice Mail voice prompts.
Hang-up to complete the session
To access your Voice Mail Box from a Remote Location:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the telephone number of a DISA CO line answered by
the VMIM/VSF Auto Attendant,
 At answer, dial # to receive the ‘Mail Box & Password’
prompt,
 Dial the Mail Box and password to receive the ‘Number of
Messages’ prompt,
 Dial desired option codes,
 At completion of session, hang-up.
LIP-8050V User Guide
8. Remote System
Access
8. REMOTE SYSTEM ACCESS
8.1
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) allows remote users to
gain access to the system’s resources (remote users may be
required to enter an Authorization Code). The system will
recognize remote user dialed inputs to call other stations, place
calls over CO/IP lines, review voice mails, etc.
To access system resources remotely:
 Call the system’s DISA facility,
 Await answer and dial your authorization code (station number
and password),
 Dial as needed for the desired system resource.
8.2
Mobile Phone Extension
When away from your desk or office you can place and receive
iPECS calls on a registered mobile phone. Calls to your iPECS
Phone will ring your Mobile Phone and you can place calls using
the resources of the iPECS. You may need to activate the
Mobile Phone Extension feature and assign the Mobile Phone
number.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To register a mobile phone number:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 37,
 Dial the mobile phone number,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To activate a registered mobile phone:
 Press the TRANS/PGM button,
 Dial 38,
 1 to activate, 0 to deactivate,
 Press the HOLD/SAVE button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS System:
 Dial the ISDN DID number of the station; the system will check
the Caller ID and answer the call. The user then will receive
intercom dial tone,
 Place internal or external iPECS calls as normal.
To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
 Dial “*” while on an iPECS call,
 Dial the desired extension, the call is transferred and the
mobile phone returns to idle.
 Reconnect to the transfer by pressing the # key.
NOTE—The mobile extension may reconnect to the transfer
by pressing the # key.
This feature is only effective with an ISDN CO line.
LIP-8050V User Guide
9. Misc. Features
9. MISC. FEATURES
9.1
Call Log
Users can view a log of incoming, outgoing and missed calls on
the display (up to 100 records). A CALL HISTORY button
provides simple access to all calls (incoming (called), outgoing
(dialed) and missed (lost) calls) at any time. The right navigation
button will access the Call Logs while idle.
Press the CALL HISTORY button or the right navigation button.
Select the call type (Incoming, Outgoing, or Missed) with the
Navigation button.
Scroll through the Call Log with the Navigation button.
To call the number:
Press CALL button to call the highlighted number.
Select MENU button to add the number to the Phone Book,
delete the record or delete all records in the Call Log.
LIP-8050V User Guide
9.2
Background Music and Music on Hold
Two audio sources can be connected to the system. These
sources or an internal source provide input for Background
Music (BGM) and Music on Hold (MOH). In addition, a recorded
message from the VMIM can be used. BGM is played over the
speakers of the iPECS Phone when the station is idle. MOH is
played to callers placed on Hold.
There are eleven possible selections for BGM and MOH:
00: Off
01: Source BGM1 (INT 1 or EXT 1)
02: Source BGM2 (EXT 2)
st
03: 1 VSF/VMIM message
2nd VSF/VMIM message
rd
3 VSF/VMIM message
04 1st SLTM message
2nd SLTM message
rd
3 SLTM message
4th SLTM message
5th SLTM message
To turn on Background Music:
 Press HOLD/SAVE to cycle through the BGM selections.
9.3
Using Internal, External and Meet-Me Paging
The User can broadcast announcements to other stations and/or
external speakers. Stations are assigned to one or more of the
Internal Page Zones. The system has two External Page
Zones that can be connected to external speakers.
Page Zone codes are:
Internal Page Zones :
501-510 (iPECS 100)
501-535 (iPECS 300 & 600)
5001-5100 (iPECS 1200)
Internal All Call Page
543
External Page Zones
545-546
External All Call Page 548
All Call Page
549
LIP-8050V User Guide
If the desired Page Zone is busy, the User can elect to be
recalled when their turn comes in the queue. Users can also
request a paged party answer the Page using Meet-Me Paging.
In this case, the paged party may answer the page from any
phone in the system by dialing the Meet-Me code.
To make a page:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial the desired Page zone,
 If assigned, after Page warning tone, make announcement.
To queue for a page when busy is received:
 Press the CALL BACK button,
 Replace the handset returning to idle.
To answer a Meet-me-Page:
 Lift the handset.
 Dial 544 (Meet-Me-Page code).
9.4
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page
iPECS Phones can be assigned as a member of one or more of
the system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. Users
separately log-in or log-out of any one or all PTT groups to
which the phone is assigned. Once logged in, place or receive
one-way page announcements to/from other users who are
logged in to the same PTT group.
To log-in to a PTT group:
 Dial #0, the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Dial the desired PTT group number (1-9 or 0 for all groups),
To log-out of the PTT group(s):
 Dial #0, the PTT Log-in/out code,
 Press the * key.
To place a page announcement to the active PTT group:
 Press and hold the PTT button,
 After confirmation tone, make page announcement.
LIP-8050V User Guide
9.5
Alarm/Door Bell
The system can monitor external Alarm or Door Bell contacts:
Alarm Monitor—should the external contact activate, a unique
Alarm Ring signal and LCD display may be received. To restart
the monitor circuit, the external contacts must be deactivated
and the Alarm Ring signal terminated.
Door Bell—a unique Door Bell Ring (single tone burst) may be
received each time the external contact is activated. A system
contact also can be assigned to act as a Door Open contact.
To terminate the Alarm signal:
 Dial 565 (Alarm Stop code).
To activate the Door Open contacts:
 Lift the handset,
 Dial Door Open code, #* and contact number 1-4.
NOTE—Contacts 3 & 4 are only available in the iPECS-300,
600 and 1200.
9.6
Power Fail Transfer (PFT)
When AC power to the system fails, back-up operation may be
provided with back-up batteries or Power Fail Transfer (PFT).
When battery back-up is provided the station will operate
normally. When PFT is implemented, an SLT is connected to a
CO line by the system. This SLT can be used as any normal
SLT, providing service while power is out.
9.7
System Voice Memo
The integrated Voice Mail modules incorporate several Voice
Memos to provide Station Users with general information such
as station number, date, time, and feature status. Voice Memos
are heard over the iPECS Phone speaker and over the handset
for SLTs.
For the Station Status Memo, the following items are reported:
ICM Signaling Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
Station IP Address
Station Mac Address
Number of messages x (x: number of all message waiting)
Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
Do Not Disturb
Forwarded to station xxx
LIP-8050V User Guide
Forwarded to speed bin xxx
Queued CO/IP line xxx
Locked (Temporary COS)
COS x
To hear Date & Time memo:
 Dial the Voice Memo code (661 for iPECS-100, or *661 for
iPECS-300 & 600 & 1200),
 Date and Time memo is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx
pm”.
To hear Station Number Prompt:
 Dial Voice Memo code (662 for iPECS-100, or *662 for iPECS300 & 600 & 1200),
 The Station Number memo is heard, “This is station 150”.
To hear Station Settings:
 Dial Voice Memo code (663 for iPECS-100, or *663 for iPECS300 & 600 & 1200)),
 Station Status Memo is heard.
NOTE—only activated features are announced.
LIP-8050V User Guide
10. PBX, Centrex, &
ISDN Features
10.
10.1
PBX, CENTREX & ISDN FEATURES
Access PBX or Centrex features
The iPECS has been designed to operate with a host PBX
system or Centrex services from your service provider. The
iPECS connects to a host with analog CO lines.
When accessing a CO line, the phone will act as an extension of
the host, allowing access to the host system features using the
host dial codes. While on a call, use the iPECS Flash feature to
transfer calls to other host extensions or access features of the
host.
The Flash feature may be used on other CO lines to regain dial
tone from the CO line without relinquishing control of the CO line
to place another call.
To access PBX or Centrex features while idle:
 Lift the handset,
 Select/dial access a PBX/Centrex CO line,
 Dial PBX/Centrex feature code.
To access PBX/Centrex features while on a PBX/Centrex CO line:
 Use the Navigation button to display the next menu, and select
the Flash button,
 After receiving new dial tone, dial the PBX/Centrex feature
code.
10.2
Access the ISDN Network
10.2.1 Using the Keypad facility to access ISDN features
Access to certain features of your ISDN services requires that
dialed digits be sent to the ISDN as data and not tones. In this
case, dialed digits are sent as ‘Keypad messages’.
A Keypad Facility button must be assigned using the Flex Button
program procedures. Once active, dial into the ISDN for
services; however, actions other than dialing will deactivate the
Keypad Facility operation.
LIP-8050V User Guide
To activate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press the programmed KEYPAD FACILITY button to switch to
keypad mode,
 Dial as desired.
To deactivate Keypad Facility operation:
 Press KEYPAD FACILITY ,
OR
 Press a Feature or Flex button.
10.2.2
Using ISDN Supplementary Services
ISDN service providers may incorporate features similar to those
of Centrex. These ISDN Supplementary services are provided
on a subscription basis, and as with Centrex, are accessed
using the Flash button on an iPECS phone.
Using supplementary services, an ISDN line can be placed on
Hold and a second call placed on the line. You may then
alternate between the two held calls (Broker Call) using the
HOLD button. An ISDN line conference can be established
using the Flash and Conf buttons. A conference can also be
placed on hold.
While on an ISDN CO line, to access ISDN Supplementary services:
 Press Flash,
 Press HOLD/SAVE , Conf, or CO line button to activate the
desired feature.
10.2.3
Activating ISDN Caller ID Restriction
iPECS Phone users can restrict the transmission of Caller ID to
the far-end. This may be a subscription service of your carrier.
Separate Flex buttons are required to activate outgoing,
Connected Line (COL), and incoming, Calling Line ID (CLID)
restriction.
To restrict Caller ID:
 Lift the handset,
 Press programmed CLIR / COLR button to place call.
LIP-8050V User Guide
11. Features & Flex
Buttons
11.
11.1
FEATURES & FLEX BUTTONS
Entering Station Program Data
A special code set is available for iPECS Phone users to assign
certain attributes such as Authorization Codes (Passwords).
After entering the User Program mode, dial the codes to select
the attribute and setting. Once selected, the setting is saved. A
list of the User Program codes, the feature/function and any
input required are given in Appendix B. In some cases, you
enter these codes as part of Flex button assignments.
To assign user programmable attributes to your station:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Dial desired User Program codes shown in Appendix B,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
11.2
Assigning Features to Flex Buttons
You may assign features and functions to the Flex buttons on
your iPECS Phone (possibly CO/IP lines as well).
Flex buttons may be assigned for most features providing OneTouch feature activation (ex., a Flex button may be assigned to
access the Account Code feature and may include the Account
code digits).
Features that may be assigned to a Flex button include:
DSS/BLF—Enter station number.
Speed Dial—Enter Station/System Speed dial bin.
Flex Numbering Plan—Enter Flex Numbering Plan code (refer
to Appendix A).
User Program Code—Press TRANS/PGM and enter a User
Program code (refer to Appendix B).
CO/IP Line—Enter the CO/IP line or group number.
To assign a feature to a Flex button:
 Press TRANS/PGM ,
 Press the desired Flex button,
 Dial desired code and required inputs; for User Program codes
(Appendix B), first press the TRANS/PGM ,
 Press HOLD/SAVE .
LIP-8050V User Guide
Appendix A Flexible Numbering Plan
FEATURE
Intercom Call
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1~2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
Last Number Redial
DND (Toggle On/Off)
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
Message Wait/Callback
Enable
Message Wait/Callback
Return
Speed Dial Access
Cancel DND/FWD/Pre MSG
CO System Hold
Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
Answering Machine
Emulation
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS Code
ACD Supervisor On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
iPECS50
100-149
iPECS100
100-169
iPECS300
100-399
501-535
543
544
545-546
548
549
iPECS600
10001599
501-535
543
544
545-546
548
549
iPECS1200
10002199
301-400
543
544
545-546
548
549
501-510
543
544
545
548
549
501-510
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
557
557
557
557
558
559
560
561
562
564
558
559
560
561
562
564
558
559
560
561
562
564
558
559
560
561
562
564
558
559
560
561
562
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
LIP-8050V User Guide
FEATURE
ACD Supervisor Status
Display
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
w/o answer
Enter Conference Room
Camp-On Answer
Call Parking Locations
Group Pilot Number
Station User VMIM/VSF
Features
Call Coverage button
Direct Call Pickup
CO/IP Group Access
Individual CO/IP Line
Access
Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
Retrieve Individual Held
CO/IP
Access CO Line in the 1st
available CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Disable
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
Door Open (4th Door )
MCID Request
AME Feature
Unsupervised Conference
Timer Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
iPECS50
576
iPECS100
576
iPECS300
576
iPECS600
576
iPECS1200
576
577
578
577
578
577
578
577
578
577
578
579
579
579
579
579
59
600
601-610
59
600
601-610
59
600
601-619
59
600
601-619
620-659
66
620-659
66
620-667
*66
620-667
*66
59
600
#601#800
401-500
*66
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
8*
8#xx
67
7
8xx
01-20
88xx
01-42
8*
8#xx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-200
8*
8#xxx
67
7
8xx
01-72
88xxx
001-400
8*
8#xxx
76
*77
89xxx
001-200
88xxx
001-600
8*
8#xxx
9
9
9
9
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
564
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
564
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
564
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
564
##
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
564
##
#0
#0
#0
#0
#0
LIP-8050V User Guide
Appendix B User Program Codes
CODE
10
11 x
12 x
FUNCTION
Enblock Mode Dialing
Differential Ring, Intercom
Differential Ring, CO/IP line
13 x
Intercom Answer Mode
14 x
15 x
19
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
52 xx
53 x
Call Coverage Attribute Setting
Station Ring Download
Ear & Mic Headset Usage
Knock Down Station COS
Restore Station COS
Walking COS
ICR SCENARIO
VM Mobile Notify
Station Message Wait Retrieve
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
Authorization Code (Password)
Entry
Assign DID CALL WAIT Button
Message Wait in
Executive/Secretary pair
Send SMS Message
Register Mobile Extension
Activate Mobile Extension
Register Mobile Ext. CLI
Set Wake-Up Time
Erase Wake-Up Time
Custom/Pre-defined Message
Display
Register Custom Message
Create Conference Room
54 x
Delete Conference Room
55
61 x
62 x
71
72
Monitor Conf. Room
Headset/Speakerphone Mode
Headset Ring Mode
LCD Display Mode
Version Display
33 x
34
35
36
37
38
39
41 xx
42
51 xx
REMARK
iPECS LIP-7000 only
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select Ring Tone 1-8
Select ICM Signal mode,
1: HF, 2: TONE, 3: Privacy
1+: ON/OFF, 2+: ring delay (0-9)
Select download Ring Tone 0-9
iPECS LIP-7000 only
May require Authorization code
May require Authorization code
Station number +up to 12 digits, no
Flex button
Input time, 24 hour clock
Select Message 00-20
Input up to 24 characters
Input Conf Room (1-9) & password
Input Conf Room (1-9) & optional
password
1: Speakerphone, 2: Headset, 3: both
LIP-8050V User Guide
CODE
73
74 x
75
76
77
78
79
7*
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
88
89
8#
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
*0
**
*7
*8
*9
FUNCTION
Background Music
Station User Name Registration
Display Phone IP Address
Change Phone IP Address
Display Phone MAC IP Address
Change Mode
Display Phone Version
Display Serial number/Package
for SMEMU
Assign RECORD Button
Assign ISDN CLIR Button
ISDN COLR Button
Assign ACCOUNT CODE Button
Assign LOOP Button
Assign ATD INTRUSION Button
ICM Button
Assign CAMP-ON Button
Assign KEYPAD FACILITY Button
Assign OHVO Button
CONF Button Assignment
CALL BACK Button Assignment
DND Button Assignment
FLASH Button Assignment
MUTE Button Assignment
MONITOR Button Assignment
REDIAL Button Assignment
FWD Button Assignment
Assign PTT Button
Hot Desk Login Code
Hot Desk Log out Code
Force Fwd to Dest.
Register Bluetooth
Bluetooth Usage
REMARK
Input up to 12 characters
Requires VSF/External SMDI VM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement